1MRS751887-MEN
Issued:
15.03.2002
Version:
A
Program revision: 4.04
We reserve the right to change data without prior notice.
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
LIB 510
Notice 1
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any error
that may occur in this document.
Notice 2
This document complies with the program revision 4.0.4.
Notice 3
Additional information such as Release Notes and Last Minute Remarks can be
found on the program distribution media.
Trademarks
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
L
ON
W
ORKS
is registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.
Other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
All Microsoft products referenced in this document are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
MicroSCADA Technology Manuals
SYS 500 manuals
COM 500 manuals
Application Objects
1MRS751848-MEN
Introduction to MicroSCADA Technology
1MRS751852-MUM
JAVA-API for MicroSCADA
1MRS751851-MEN
Programming Language SCIL
1MRS751849-MEN
SCIL-API for MicroSCADA
1MRS752199-MEN
Status Codes
1MRS751850-MEN
System Configuration
1MRS751846-MEN
System Objects
1MRS751847-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for OPC DA Client
1MRS752246-MEN
Installation
1MRS751853-MEN
Picture Editing
1MRS751854-MEN
System Management
1MRS751857-MEN
Visual SCIL Objects
1MRS751856-MEN
Visual SCIL User Interface Design
1MRS751855-MEN
COM 500 Engineering
1MRS751858-MEN
Connecting LONWORKS Devices to MicroSCADA
1MRS751845-MEN
Communication Programming Interface (CPI)
1MRS751859-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for DNP V3.00 Master Protocol
1MRS751860-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for DNP V3.00 Slave Protocol
1MRS751861-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-101 Master Protocol
1MRS751862-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-101 Slave Protocol
1MRS751863-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-103 Master Protocol
1MRS752012-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-104 Master Protocol
1MRS751964-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for IEC 60870-5-104 Slave Protocol
1MRS751965-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for Modbus Master Protocol
1MRS752242-MEN
Configuring MicroSCADA for Modbus Slave Protocol
1MRS751864-MEN
LIB 510
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 500 manuals
LIB 510 manuals
SMS 510 manuals
CAP 505 manuals
Common manual for LIB, CAP and SMS
LIB 500 Configuration Manual
1MRS751880-MEN
LIB 500 Operator’s Manual
1MRS751885-MUM
LIB 510 Configuration
1MRS751886-MEN
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510 MV Process Operator’s Manual
1MRS751891-MUM
LIB 510 Operator’s Manual
1MRS751888-MUM
SMS 510 Installation and Commissioning
1MRS751897-MEN
SMS 510 Operator’s Manual
1MRS751898-MUM
CAP 505 Installation and Commissioning
1MRS751901-MEN
CAP 505 Operator’s Manual
1MRS751902-MUM
Relay Configuration Tool Tutorial
1MRS751903-MEN
Relay Mimic Editor Configuration
1MRS751904-MEN
Relay Configuration Tool Quick Start Reference
1MRS751905-MEN
SPTO Configuration Tool
1MRS751906-MEN
Protocol Editing Tool
1MRS751982-MUM
Tools for Relays and Terminals
1MRS752008-MUM
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Configuration Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 REC 501
11 DTU
12 Combined switch device state
LIB 510
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
Contents
Configuration Guide
Contents:
1. MV process general ..................................................................1
1.1. Installing and configuring MV Process functions ...........................1
1.2. Graphical representations and functionality ..................................2
1.2.1. Attribute expressions for color definitions ..........................3
1.3. The default RI-attribute values for printouts within MV Process ...3
1.3.1. Format picture for double binary (OV related) ...................3
1.3.2. Format picture for single binary indication (OV related) .....4
1.3.3. Format picture for analog indication (OV related) ..............6
1.3.4. Format picture for analog indication (AZ related) ...............6
1.3.5. Format picture for analog indication (integer OV) ..............6
1.3.6. Format picture for analog indication (real OV) ...................6
1.3.7. Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related) ...........7
1.3.8. Format picture for digital output (OV related) .....................8
1.3.9. Format picture for analog output (OV related) ...................9
2. Station ......................................................................................11
2.3. Picture function configuration ......................................................12
2.3.1. Preliminary work ..............................................................12
2.3.2. Configuration with standard configuration tool .................12
2.3.3. Configuration with representation tool .............................18
2.3.4. Configuration with process object tool .............................18
2.3.5. An example of the station configuration ...........................19
2.4. Application engineering information ............................................19
2.4.1. The structure of the station picture function .....................19
2.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................20
2.4.3. Language text files ...........................................................20
2.4.4. Help text files ...................................................................21
2.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................21
2.4.6. Other text files ..................................................................21
2.4.7. Process objects ................................................................21
2.4.8. Scale objects ....................................................................22
2.4.9. Command procedures .....................................................23
2.4.10.Event channels ................................................................23
3.1. Communication support ..............................................................25
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Contents
Configuration Guide
3.2. Picture function installation ......................................................... 25
3.3. Picture function configuration ..................................................... 26
3.3.1. Preliminary work .............................................................. 26
3.3.2. Configuration with standard configuration tool ................. 26
3.3.3. Configuration with representation tool ............................. 34
3.3.4. Configuration with process object Tool ............................ 34
3.3.5. An example of the bay configuration ............................... 35
3.4. Application engineering information ............................................ 36
3.4.1. The structure of the bay picture function ......................... 36
3.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................ 36
3.4.3. Language text files .......................................................... 37
3.4.4. Help text files ................................................................... 37
3.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................ 38
3.4.6. Other text files ................................................................. 38
3.4.7. Process objects ............................................................... 38
3.4.8. Scale Objects .................................................................. 40
3.4.9. Command procedures ..................................................... 40
3.4.10.Event channels ................................................................ 41
4. Switching device .................................................................... 43
4.2.1. Environmental requirements ............................................ 43
4.2.2. Installation ....................................................................... 44
4.3. Picture function configuration ..................................................... 44
4.3.1. Preliminary work .............................................................. 44
4.3.2. Configuration with the standard configuration tool ........... 45
4.3.3. Configuration with representation tool ............................. 58
4.3.4. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ..................... 78
4.3.5. An Example of the switching device configuration ........... 82
4.4. Application engineering information ............................................ 83
4.4.1. The structure of the switching device .............................. 83
4.4.2. Pictures ............................................................................ 83
4.4.3. Language text files .......................................................... 84
4.4.4. Help text files ................................................................... 85
4.4.5. Configuration files ............................................................ 85
4.4.6. Other text files ................................................................. 86
4.4.7. Process objects ............................................................... 86
4.4.8. Scale objects ................................................................... 93
4.4.9. Command procedures ..................................................... 93
4.4.10.Event channels ................................................................ 94
5. Measurements ........................................................................ 95
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
Contents
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5.3. Picture function configuration ......................................................96
5.3.1. Preliminary work ..............................................................96
5.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ........96
5.3.3. Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................104
5.3.4. Configuration with Process Object Tool .........................110
5.3.5. An example of the measurement configuration .............111
5.4. Application engineering information ..........................................113
5.4.1. Limit supervision ............................................................113
5.4.2. The structure of the measurement .................................113
5.4.3. Pictures ..........................................................................113
5.4.4. Language text files .........................................................115
5.4.5. Help text files .................................................................115
5.4.6. Configuration files ..........................................................115
5.4.7. Other text files ................................................................116
5.4.8. Process objects ..............................................................116
5.4.9. Scale objects ..................................................................118
5.4.10.Command procedures ...................................................118
6. Transformer ...........................................................................119
6.3. Picture function configuration ....................................................120
6.3.1. Preliminary work ............................................................120
6.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......120
6.3.3. Configuration of the transformer measurement .............127
6.3.4. Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................128
6.3.5. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................128
6.3.6. An example of the transformer configuration .................130
6.4. Application engineering information ..........................................131
6.4.1. Pictures ..........................................................................131
6.4.2. Language text files .........................................................132
6.4.3. Help text files .................................................................132
6.4.4. Configuration files ..........................................................133
6.4.5. Other text files ................................................................133
6.4.6. Process objects ..............................................................133
6.4.7. Scale objects ..................................................................135
6.4.8. Command procedures ...................................................135
6.4.9. Event channels ..............................................................135
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Contents
Configuration Guide
7. Protection tripping tag ......................................................... 137
7.3.1. Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration
Tool ................................................................................ 137
7.3.2. Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool .... 146
7.3.3. Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool .... 150
7.4. Application engineering information .......................................... 151
7.4.1. Pictures .......................................................................... 151
7.4.2. Language text files ........................................................ 151
7.4.3. Help text files ................................................................. 151
7.4.4. Configuration files .......................................................... 152
7.4.5. Other text files ............................................................... 152
7.4.6. Process objects ............................................................. 152
7.4.7. Scale objects ................................................................. 152
8. Auto-reclosing (AR) tag ....................................................... 153
8.3.1. Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration
Tool ................................................................................ 153
8.3.2. Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool .... 161
8.3.3. Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool .... 163
8.4. Application engineering information .......................................... 164
8.4.1. The structure of the auto-reclosing tag .......................... 164
8.4.2. Pictures .......................................................................... 164
8.4.3. Language text files ........................................................ 165
8.4.4. Help text files ................................................................. 165
8.4.5. Configuration files .......................................................... 165
8.4.6. Other text files ............................................................... 166
8.4.7. Process objects ............................................................. 166
8.4.8. Scale objects ................................................................. 167
9. Alarm indicator ..................................................................... 169
9.3. Picture function configuration ................................................... 170
9.3.1. Preliminary work ............................................................ 170
9.3.2. Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ...... 170
9.3.3. Configuration with the Representation Tool ................... 174
9.3.4. Configuration with the Process Object Tool ................... 176
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
Contents
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9.3.5. An example of the alarm indicator configuration ............177
9.4. Application engineering information ..........................................177
9.4.1. The structure of the alarm indicator ...............................177
9.4.2. Pictures ..........................................................................177
9.4.3. Language text files .........................................................178
9.4.4. Help text files .................................................................178
9.4.5. Configuration files ..........................................................178
10.REC 501 .................................................................................179
10.3.Picture function configuration ...................................................180
10.3.1.Preliminary work ............................................................180
10.3.2.Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......180
10.3.3.Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................186
10.3.4.Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................187
10.4.Application engineering information .........................................189
10.4.1.The structure of REC 501 ..............................................189
10.4.2.Pictures ..........................................................................189
10.4.3.Language text files .........................................................190
10.4.4.Help text files .................................................................190
10.4.5.Configuration files ..........................................................191
10.4.6.Other text files ................................................................191
10.4.7.Process objects ..............................................................192
10.4.8.Scale objects ..................................................................194
10.4.9.Command procedures ...................................................194
10.4.10.Event channels .............................................................194
10.4.11.Time channels ..............................................................194
11.DTU ........................................................................................195
11.3.Picture function configuration ...................................................196
11.3.1.Preliminary work ............................................................196
11.3.2.Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool ......196
11.3.3.Configuration with the Representation Tool ...................200
11.3.4.Configuration with the Process Object Tool ...................201
11.3.5.An Example of the DTU configuration ............................203
11.4.Application engineering information .........................................203
11.4.1.The structure of the DTU ...............................................203
11.4.2.Pictures ..........................................................................204
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510 MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Contents
Configuration Guide
11.4.3.Language text files ........................................................ 205
11.4.4.Help text files ................................................................. 205
11.4.5.Configuration files .......................................................... 205
11.4.6.Other text files ............................................................... 206
11.4.7.Process objects ............................................................. 206
11.4.8.Scale objects ................................................................. 208
11.4.9.Command procedures ................................................... 209
11.4.10.Event channels ............................................................ 209
11.4.11.Time channels ............................................................. 209
12.Combined switch device state ........................................... 211
12.4.Picture Function Configuration ................................................. 212
12.4.1.Preliminary Work ........................................................... 212
12.4.2.Configuration with Standard Configuration Tool ............ 212
12.4.3.Configuration with Representation Tool ......................... 214
12.4.4.Configuration with Bay Configuration Tool .................... 215
12.4.5.An example of the combined switch device state
configuration .................................................................. 217
12.4.6.The structure of the combined switch device state
function .......................................................................... 217
12.4.7.Pictures .......................................................................... 217
12.4.8.Help text files ................................................................. 217
12.4.9.Configuration files .......................................................... 218
12.4.10.Other text files .............................................................. 218
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
1
1. MV process general
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1
1.
MV process general
This chapter describes the most common processes seen from the library
implementations in LIB 500 and LIB 510 revision 4.0.4.
1.1.
Installing and configuring MV Process functions
The installation of standard functions is divided into two main parts:
1. Installation
2. Configuration
The tools, i.e. Installation Tool, Standard Configuration Tool, Process Object Tool
and the Representation Tool are shortly described in the LIB 500 Configuration
Manual, Introduction.
1.1.1.
Installing
The installation of application specific picture functions is described in LIB 500
Configuration Manual, Component Library.
The name of the picture function (ID) should be unique within the same picture. It
is wise to use such an identification that is universal, i.e. the identification does not
refer to any particular substation. This makes sense when copying the single line
drawing (*.PIC) and saving it with another name, and then reusing it again in
another project.
Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_). However,
the name of the picture function cannot begin with a digit or an underscore.
The drawing layer of the transformer can be edited by the Picture Editor; it is
possible to define the picture function layer above or below the static background
drawing.
1.1.2.
Configuring
The object identification in the database
The LIB5xx 4.0.4 supports partitioning of the OI-attribute into five (5) identification
fields. If less than five fields will be used, the unused fields have to be the last ones
i.e. the fifth field, the fourth field, etc. By default, only three fields will be used:
Table 1.1.2-1
OI-attribute identification fields
The sum of the field lengths should be equal or less than 30 characters.
Field
Default length
Range
Station name
10 characters (9 characters +
1 space)
2 .. 28
Bay name
15 characters (14 characters
+ 1 space)
2 .. 28
Device/apparatus name
5 characters
0, 2 .. 26 (0 = not in use)
Not specified
0
0, 2 .. 24 (0 = not in use)
Not specified
0
0 .. 22 (0 = not in use)
1MRS751887-MEN
2
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
1.
MV process general
Configuration Guide
The hierarchical structure always has to be maintained while reconfiguring the OI-
attribute. The first field defines the biggest group, the second field is a subgroup of
the biggest group and so on. MV Process will require substation and bay field in
order to work properly.
If the utilisation of the OI-attribute needs to be modified due to different customer
requirements, the OI-attribute has to be changed before starting the creation of the
application database, i.e. there should not be any process objects in the process
object database. The configuration can be done in the SYS_BASCON.COM file.
The object identification in the application
Due to the obligatory substation and bay identification field in the database, there is
a setting tool which defines how the OI-attribute will be shown in printouts, event
lists, alarm lists, dialogs, etc.
The configuration of the OI-attribute visibility is global, i.e. all functions done by
the LIB 5xx 4.0.4 follow the same definition. The fields starting from the beginning
and/or the end of OI-attribute can be defined as not visible. A field between visible
fields cannot be set as invisible. The reason for this lies in the performance
requirements.
In Application Settings view, the setting tool Show Object Identification for setting
the OI-attribute visibility in the application can be found in the Tools menu.
The naming convention of the database
The naming convention of the process objects should be scrutinised carefully so that
there will not be any conflicts in the database during installation. Three characters
of substation name, four characters of bay and two characters of device or apparatus
have been found to be a well-proven naming convention. With a proper naming
convention it is easy to navigate in the process object database, and it makes it easier
to copy process objects (related to a certain substation) between different
applications.
Application and Monitor Language
If some other language than English is used in the signal texts (OX-attribute), it is
necessary to define this local language at least for the user who is doing the
application engineering. It is also very important that the translation of all signal
texts has already been performed by the Text Translation Tool or by other means.
1.2.
Graphical representations and functionality
In this chapter, the general functionality of the standard functions is described. After
general principles and common functions, all the different standard functions are
described in detail, one by one.
Some principles are general and used for all standard functions (colors etc.). A
description of these general principles is provided below.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
3
1. MV process general
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1
1.2.1.
Attribute expressions for color definitions
Table 1.2.1-1
Attribut expressions for color definitions
1.3.
The default RI-attribute values for printouts within MV Process
1.3.1.
Format picture for double binary (OV related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPDB1
Table 1.3.1-1
Format picture for double binary (OV related)
Description
Attribute used
Color
Comment
Selected object under
command
BI = 1
White flashing
-
Selected on the
MicroSCADA screen
AI > 0
White
-
Value substituted
SU = 1
Dark blue
Internal substitution
Update blocked
UB = 1
Magenta
Only for input objects
Not sampled
OS = 10
Magenta
No value is presented
Not updated
OS = 2 (NT=1) or
OS = 4..9
Magenta
Last known value is
presented
Value substituted
SB = 1
Dark blue
External substitution
Update blocked
BL = 1
Magenta
External block
Invalid value
OS = 1 (IV=1)
Magenta
Last known value is
presented
Unacknowledged alarm
AR = 0
Red flashing
-
Acknowledged alarm
AL = 1 and AR = 1
Red
-
Control blocked
UB = 1
Brown
Only for output objects
Alarms blocked
AB = 1
Yellow
-
Events blocked
HB = 1
Yellow
-
Printout blocked
PB = 1
Yellow
-
Reprocessing blocked
XB = 1
Yellow
-
Warning
AZ = 3-4
Yellow
Only for measurements
Manually entered
Not(SS >= 2 and
UN <> 0)
Cyan
-
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Station
10
(110)
Station local/remote-switch
1
Bay
10
(110)
Bay local/remote-switch
2
Switching device
10
(110)
Circuit breaker position indication
3
Switching device
10
(110)
Disconnector position indication
4
4
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
1.
MV process general
Configuration Guide
1.3.2.
Format picture for single binary indication (OV related)
/LIB4/F
#
MOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPBI1
Table 1.3.2-1
Format picture for single binary indication (OV related)
Switching device
10
(110)
Earth switch position indication
5
Switching device
30
(130)
Truck position indication
6
Switching device
10
(110)
3-state switch position indication (disc.
section)
7
Switching device
11
(111)
3-state switch position indication (earth sw.
section)
8
Transformer*
11
111**
AVR auto/manual
9
Transformer*
11
111**
AVR auto/manual
10
REC 501
10
Position indication
11
DTU 10
Position
indication
12
Alarm indicator
10..17
Indication
13
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Bay
10
(110)
Bay local/remote-switch
1
Bay
15,16,18
(115,116)
Bay interlocking
2
Switching device
15,16,17
(115,116,117)
Circuit breaker blocking and interl. 3
Switching device
20
Circuit breaker command event
4
Switching device
(210)
Circuit breaker position indication
5
Switching device
(210)
Circuit breaker open position
indication
6
Switching device
(208)
Circuit breaker close position
indication
7
Switching device
15,16,17
(115,116,117)
Disconnector blocking and interl.
8
Switching device
20
Disconnector command event
9
Switching device
(210)
Disconnector position indication
10
Switching device
(210)
Disconnector open position
indication
11
Switching device
(208)
Disconnector close position
indication
12
Switching device
15,16,17
(115,116,117)
Earth switch blocking and interl.
13
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
5
1. MV process general
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1
Switching device
20
Earth switch command event
14
Switching device
(210)
Earth switch position indication
15
Switching device
(210)
Earth switch open position
indication
16
Switching device
(208)
Earth switch close position
indication
17
Switching device
35,36,37
(135,136,137)
Truck blocking and interlocking
18
Switching device
40
Truck command event
19
Switching device
(230)
Truck position indication
20
Switching device
(230)
Truck open position indication
21
Switching device
(228)
Truck close position indication
22
Switching device
18,19,20,21,22
(118,119,120,
121,122)
3-state switch blocking and
interlocking
23
Switching device
26
3-state switch command event
24
Switching device
(210)
3-state switch position indication
(disc. section)
25
Switching device
(211)
3-state switch position indication
(earth sw. section)
26
Switching device
(210)
3-state switch open position
indication (disc. section)
27
Switching device
(208)
3-state switch close position
indication (disc. section)
28
Switching device
(211)
3-state switch open position
indication (earth sw. section)
29
Switching device
(209)
3-state switch close position
indication (earth sw. section)
30
Switching device
21
(121)
Auxialiry plug
31
Auto-reclosing tag
10,11
(110,111)
Auto-reclosure in use/out of use
32
Auto-reclosing tag
12
(112)
Auto-reclosing progress indication 33
Trip tag
10
(110)
General protection trip indication
34
Trip tag
11
(111)
General trip relay latched ind.
35
Transformer
11
(111)
AVR auto/manual
36
Transformer*
11
(111)
AVR auto/manual
(reverse polarity)
37
DTU
13
Local/remote
38
Alarm Indicator
10..17
Alarm ON/OFF
39
Alarm Indicator
10..17
Alarm ON/OFF
40
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
6
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
1.
MV process general
Configuration Guide
1.3.3.
Format picture for analog indication (OV related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI1
Table 1.3.3-1
Format picture for analog indication (OV related)
1.3.4.
Format picture for analog indication (AZ related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI2
Table 1.3.4-1
Format picture for analog indication (AZ related)
1.3.5.
Format picture for analog indication (integer OV)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI3
Table 1.3.5-1
Format picture for analog indication (integer OV)
1.3.6.
Format picture for analog indication (real OV)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAI4
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Station
15
Station blocking
1
Bay
20
Bay blocking
2
Switching device
(210)
Circuit breaker position indication
3
Switching device
(210)
Disconnector position indication
4
Switching device
(210)
Earth switch position indication
5
Switching device
(230)
Truck position indication
6
Switching device
(210)
3-state switch position indication
(disc. section)
7
Switching device
(211)
3-state switch position indication
(earth sw. section)
8
Auto-reclosing tag
12
Auto-reclosing progress indication
9
All
N/A
Command termination with IEC
870-5-101 and IEC 870-5-103
10
Transformer
12
AVR single/parallel
11
DTU
100
DTU blockings
12
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Measurement
10 ...
Alarm and warning printout
1
Transformer
24,29
Alarm and warning printout
2
Alarm Indicator
10..17
Alarm and warning printout
3
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Transformer
10
Tap position
1
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
7
1. MV process general
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1
Table 1.3.6-1
Format picture for analog indication (real OV)
1.3.7.
Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPBO1
Table 1.3.7-1
Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related)
*
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Transformer
25
Reference voltage
1
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Station
11,12,13,14
Station L/R-switch control
1
Bay
11,12,13,14
Bay L/R-switch control
2
Bay
17,19
Bay interlocking control
3
Switching device
11
Circuit breaker open select
4
Switching device
12
Circuit breaker close select
5
Switching device
13
Circuit breaker execute selected
6
Switching device
14
Circuit breaker cancel selected
7
Switching device
13
Circuit breaker select and execute 8
Switching device
11
Circuit breaker open execute
9
Switching device
12
Circuit breaker close execute
10
Switching device
11
Disconnector open select
11
Switching device
12
Disconnector close select
12
Switching device
13
Disconnector execute selected
13
Switching device
14
Disconnector cancel selected
14
Switching device
13
Disconnector select and execute
15
Switching device
11
Disconnector open execute
16
Switching device
12
Disconnector close execute
17
Switching device
11
Earth switch open select
18
Switching device
12
Earth switch close select
19
Switching device
13
Earth switch execute selected
20
Switching device
14
Earth switch cancel selected
21
Switching device
13
Earth switch select and execute
22
Switching device
11
Earth switch open execute
23
Switching device
12
Earth switch close execute
24
Switching device
31
Truck open select
25
Switching device
32
Truck close select
26
Switching device
33
Truck execute selected
27
Switching device
34
Truck cancel selected
28
Switching device
33
Truck select and execute
29
Switching device
31
Truck open execute
30
8
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
1.
MV process general
Configuration Guide
1.3.8.
Format picture for digital output (OV related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPDO1
Table 1.3.8-1
Format picture for digital output (OV related)
Switching device
32
Truck close execute
31
Switching device
12
3-state switch open select
32
Switching device
13
3-state switch close select
33
Switching device
14
3-state switch free select
34
Switching device
15
3-state switch earth select
35
Switching device
16
3-state switch execute selected
36
Switching device
17
3-state switch cancel selected
37
Switching device
16
3-state sw. (disconnector section)
select and execute
38
Switching device
17
3-state sw. (earth switch section)
select and execute
39
Switching device
12
3-state switch open execute
40
Switching device
13
3-state switch close execute
41
Switching device
14
3-state switch free execute
42
Switching device
15
3-state switch earth execute
43
Auto-reclosing tag
13
Auto-reclosing interruption
44
Auto-reclosing tag
14
Auto-reclosure in use
45
Trip tag
12...17
Latched trip relay reset
46
Transformer
14,15,16,17,18
Object command
47
Transformer
14
Object command (RTU-200)
48
Transformer
16
Object command (RTU-200)
49
REC 501
11
Open select
50
REC 501
12
Close select
51
REC 501
13
Execute selected
52
REC 501
14
Cancel selected
53
REC 501
13
Select and execute
54
DTU
11,12
Select and execute
55
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Switching device
11
Circuit breaker open execute
1
Switching device
12
Circuit breaker close execute
2
Switching device
11
Disconnector open execute
3
Switching device
12
Disconnector close execute
4
Switching device
11
Earth switch open execute
5
Switching device
12
Earth switch close execute
6
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
9
1. MV process general
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
1
1.3.9.
Format picture for analog output (OV related)
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE/FORM4FPAO1
Table 1.3.9-1
Format picture for analog output (OV related)
Switching device
31
Truck open execute
7
Switching device
32
Truck close execute
8
Switching device
12
3-state switch open execute
9
Switching device
13
3-state switch close execute
10
Switching device
14
3-state switch free execute
11
Switching device
15
3-state switch earth execute
12
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Device
IX
Purpose
RI
Default
0
Switching device
13
Circuit breaker select and
execute
1
Switching device
13
Disconnector select and execute 2
Switching device
13
Earth switch select and execute
3
Switching device
33
Truck select and execute
4
Switching device
16
3-state sw. (disconnector
section) select and execute
5
Switching device
17
3-state sw. (earth switch section)
select and execute
6
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
11
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
2. Station
2.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/REX (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• Modbus RTU
2.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of picture functions for the MV Process
station function. The picture function for the station is found in the directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Station). This picture function is
configured by using standard configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Process Object Tool
2.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the station to have full functionality, the Base component has to be
installed first.
2.2.2.
Installation
The size of the station picture function is 80 x 40 pixels (5 x 2 semigraphical blocks).
The button and field frame are drawn out of this area.
Owing to the limitation of the Station Authority dialog (Control authority of Control
Centers), it is not recommended to install more than one station picture function/
picture. However, if there is more than one station picture function in the same
picture, the Station Authority will only recognize the last one (installed as the last
station picture function).
Fig. 2.2.2.-1 presents a visible station picture function as a part of a complete
substation.
1MRS751887-MEN
12
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
)LJ
7\SLFDOLQVWDOODWLRQIRUDYLVLEOHVWDWLRQSLFWXUHIXQFWLRQ
In MicroSCADA 8.4.4 you can have up to 10 000 station picture functions in one
picture, instead of having only one station picture function like in the former
MicroSCADA version. Due to this feature, the ’Station/Local/Remote’ field on the
header bar will no longer be displayed, indicating that there is a hidden station
picture function installed in the picture.
Table 2.2.2-1
During the installation, the following information has to be
given.
2.3.
Picture function configuration
2.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of the object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming
convention of the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal
texts into the local language has to be performed. For further information, please
refer to the General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.
2.3.2.
Configuration with standard configuration tool
The station picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Standard Configuration Tool:
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Picture function name
Name of the picture function within the picture
-
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
13
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
Table 2.3.2-1
Configurable attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not
configurable
STATION_LABEL
The abbreviation of the station
-
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol
RED 500/
REX (LON)
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status with DNP 3.0
protocol
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNI
T
The data acquisition unit towards process
None
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP The name of the authorization group
MV_CONTR
OL
STATION_LR_IN_USE
Station local/remote-switch used for control
authority checking
Yes
LR_REMOTELY_CONTRO
LLABLE
Station local/remote-switch remotely
controllable/ manually operated
Yes
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event recording with RP
570
No process
objects
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to
select or enter the name of the substation.
By default the maximum length of the text is
9 characters. The selection list shows up to
ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read
directly from the process object database, if
there is any process object linked to the
selected station picture function. Therefore,
the configurable attribute within a picture
function has only meaning when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation
identifier of the common station objects on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects withinthe same substation.
14
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
a special identifier of the common station. By default this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the
SCT. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected station picture function. Therefore,
the configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
common station on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
STATION_LABEL
The abbreviation of the station. The maximum length of the
text is 7 characters.
Due to the limited space on the substation single line
diagram, this label will be used as an identifier of the
common stationobjects on the screen.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
15
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
The following list is presented as an example of the proper
namingconvention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects (not
required with the station picture function).
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx (LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 870-5-101
- IEC 870-5-103
- DNP 3.0
- Modbus RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).
CMD_PARAMETER
A selector type of a combo box to select command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected,
otherwise this attribute is beind disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
16
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 870-5-101 protocol and
- Direct
- Direct - No ack.
for DNP 3.0 protocol
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the bay local/remote-switch.
This selection is not obligatory, if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type desig-
nation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data acqui-
sition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and
SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with an under-
score (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction charac-
ter ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one
data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
17
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as
a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents
of the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.
The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to
be included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by
the system manager with User Management pictures.
STATION_LR_IN_USE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the station
local/remote-switch is in use, i.e. a physcal switch exists.
By default the station local/remote-switch is in use.
If this selection is set OFF, the control authority is given to
everyone whose personal authorization level is high enough
for the control actions. This is gained by setting the state
(value) of the station local/remote-switch permanently out of
use.
The process object for station local/remote-switch is created
regardless of the selection. If the station local/remote-switch
is NOT in use, the process object should be left as it is
created, i.e. switching state (SS) to manual and value (DB)
as 3 (out of use).
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROL
LABLE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button for the selection,
whether the station local/remote-switch can be controlled
remotely by SCS or MicroSCADA or not.
By default the station local/remote-switch is defined as
manually controllable only.
Typically, if there is a remote control for the station local/
remote -switch, switching election between station and
remote can be done remotely, whereas switching election to
or from local has to be performed locally.
Switching to and from local:
This can be archieved by setting the attribute SS (switching
state) of the local command -process object to OFF (0).
Setting the SS-attribute to 0 will make relevant radio-button
in the dialog insensitive for selections.
18
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
2.3.3.
Configuration with representation tool
The station picture function has no attributes to configure with the Representation
Tool.
2.3.4.
Configuration with process object tool
Depending on the configuration of the station picture function, the Process Object
Tool will create a certain set of the process objects into the database. Those process
objects which are going be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a
station number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all
other attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.
The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on the following list:
Table 2.3.4-1
The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Station local/remote-switch
indication
The station local/remote-switch is used to
determine whether the control to the station
objects is allowed from the panel (local), from the
substation control system, from the remote control
system or station authority checking is out of use.
11
Station local/remote-switch
to Local-command
The station local/remote-switch to Local-command
object is an output object which is designed to set
the station control to local (panel).
12
Station local/remote-switch
to Station-command
The station local/remote-switch to Station-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station control to substation
control system (station).
13
Station local/remote-switch
to Remote-command
The station local/remote-switch to Remote-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station control to network
control system (remote).
14
Station local/remote -switch
to Out of use-command
The station local/remote-switch to Out of use-
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the station authority checking out
of use.
15
Station blockings
(optional)
The indication for station blockings is an internal
object which is meant for generating events and
printouts of the station blockings.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
19
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
2.3.5.
An example of the station configuration
An example of the configuration of the station picture function:
Table 2.3.5-1
An example of the configuration of the station picture function
2.4.
Application engineering information
2.4.1.
The structure of the station picture function
This chapter describes the structure of the station picture function. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
station is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.
The installation of the “instance” picture function will automatically install “type”
picture function (FPI_STA2T) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture
function contains all common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is
only visible at the Picture Editor.
16
Station selected on monitor
(optional)
The indication for station selected on monitor is an
internal object and it is used to inform other users
that the station dialog has been opened by another
user(s).
110
Station local/remote-switch
indication
Created only for ANSI and RTU type stations. For
ANSI it is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as an event recording object.
111-114
Indication for command
termination
(optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether
the issued command was successful or not.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Attribute
Value
Picture Function Name
STA
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
N/A
STATION_LABEL
Station
P_OBJECT_LN
EST
STATION_TYPE
RED 500 / REx (LON)
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
SPTO12D4
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
STATION_LR_IN_USE
Yes
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE
No
EVENT_RECORDING
N/A
20
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
2.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all station pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 2.4.2-1
Station pictures
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 2.4.2-2
Station pictures
2.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the station
picture function.
The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 2.4.3-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
Picture
Functionality
FPI_STA2T.PIC
Common programs for all station picture functions
FPI_STA2I.PIC
Picture function (5*2) for station
Picture
Functionality
FPU_STA2A.PIC
Main dialog
FPU_STA2B.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_STA2C.PIC
Update process data dialog
FPU_STA2D.PIC
Active object messages dialog
FPU_STA2E.PIC
Station blocking dialog
FPU_STA2F.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_STA2G.PIC
Combo-box list picture for the alarm state dialog
FORM4FPDB1.PIC
Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of
signals in MV Process
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals
in MV Process
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals
in MV Process
Text file
Functionality
FPI_STA2.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FPU_STA2.TXT
Text file for all station dialogs
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
21
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
2.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the station help text files.
The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 2.4.4-1
Station help text files
2.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the station picture function. The path
is LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 2.4.5-1
The station picture configuration files
2.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the station. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 2.4.6-1
Text files used by the station
2.4.7.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created depending on the configuration of the
station.
Help file
Functionality
FPI_STA2.HLP
Picture function installation help file
FPU_STA2A.HLP
Main dialog help file
FPU_STA2C.HLP
Update process data dialog help file
FPU_STA2D.HLP
Active object messages dialog help file
FPU_STA2E.HLP
Station blocking dialog help file
FPU_STA2F.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_STA2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for station when it is created,
modified or deleted by configuration tools.
FPI_STA2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for installation tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog for station.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
22
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
2.
Station
Configuration Guide
Table 2.4.7-1
The manually operated station local/remote-switch will create
the following process objects with the Process Object Tool
Table 2.4.7-2
The remotely controllable station local/remote-switch will
create the following process objects with the Process Object
Tool
2.4.8.
Scale objects
At the first installation the station creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Station local/remote-switch
ind.
FPASTAILRS
15
AI
Blockings
Internal
Optional
FPASTAXBLK
16
AI
Station selected on
monitor
Internal
Optional
FPASTAXMEV
110
EVREC
Station local/remote-switch
ind.
RP570 only
Optional
FPASTAELRS
110
AI
Station local/remote-switch
ind.
ANSI only
FPASTAELRS
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Station local/remote-
switch ind.
FPASTAILRS
11
BO
L/R-sw. to Local -
command
FPASTACLRS
12
BO
L/R-sw. to Station -
command
FPASTACLRS
13
BO
L/R-sw. to Remote -
command
FPASTACLRS
14
BO
L/R-sw. to Out of use -
command
FPASTACLRS
15
AI
Blockings
Internal
Optional
FPASTAXBLK
16
AI
Station selected on
monitor
Internal
Optional
FPASTAXMEV
110
EVREC
Station local/remote-
switch ind.
RP570 only
Optional
FPASTAELRS
110
AI
Station local/remote-
switch ind.
ANSI only
FPASTAELRS
111-114
TERM
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101
and -103 only
Optional
FPASTATOBC
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
23
2. Station
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
2
2.4.9.
Command procedures
At the first installation the station creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function. It is also used by the Update process
data dialog.
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates station local/remote-switch
indication double binary from an analog input.
2.4.10.
Event channels
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
25
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
3. Bay
3.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/REX (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• MODBUS RTU
3.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of a picture function for the MV Process bay
function. The picture function for the bay is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Bay). Configuration of this picture
function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Process Object Tool
3.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order that the bay would have full functionality, the following components need
to be installed:
• Base
• Station (*)
(*) It is also possible to configure the bay to operate without the station picture
function. However, the bay requires the station to be installed by default.
3.2.2.
Installation
The size of the bay picture function is 80 x 40 pixels (5 x 2 semigraphical blocks).
The button and field frame is drawn out of this area.
Fig. 3.2.2.-1 presents a bay picture function as a part of a complete bay.
1MRS751887-MEN
26
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
)LJ
7\SLFDOED\LQVWDOODWLRQ
Table 3.2.2-1
During the installation the following information has to be
given
3.3.
Picture function configuration
3.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory con-
figurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage
of the object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention of
the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local
language has to be performed. Please refer to the General chapter in this MV Pro-
cess Configuration Manual for further information.
3.3.2.
Configuration with standard configuration tool
It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.
The bay picture function has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool
Table 3.3.2-1
Configurable attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Picture Function Name:
Name of the picture function within the picture
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
27
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
BAY_LABEL
The abbreviation of the bay
-
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol RED 500/REX (LON)
CMD_PARAMETER
Parameter for control method for IEC
8750-5-101 and DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status with
DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
The data acquisition unit towards
process
None
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization group
MV_CONTROL
BAY_LR_IN_USE
Physical L/R-switch exists/not
available
Bay L/R-switch exists
IND_DOUBLE_BINARY
Indication type double binary/single
binary
Double binary
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLL
ABLE
Bay L/R-switch remotely controllable/
manually operated
Manually operated
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event recording
with RP 570
No process objects
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
Program to define other objects
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the com-
mon bay objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same substation.
28
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the com-
mon bay objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same bay (feeder).
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the common bay. By default, this identi-
fier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected bay picture function. Therefore, the config-
urable attribute within a picture function has meaning only
when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the com-
mon bay on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc.
BAY_LABEL
The abbreviation of the bay/feeder. The maximum length of
the text is 7 characters.
Owing to the limited space on the substation single line dia-
gram, this label will be used as an identifier of the bay/feeder
on the screen.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
29
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The max-
imum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters
are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined nam-
ing convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the com-
plete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following
naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs, unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects.
30
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as fol-
lows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx (LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 870-5-101
- IEC 870-5-103
- DNP 3.0
- Modbus RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).
CMD_PARAMETER
A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected, other-
wise this attribute is being disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 870-5-101 protocol and
- Direct
- Direct-No ack.
for DNP 3.0 protocol.
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0 pro-
tocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the config-
urable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
31
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the bay local/remote-switch.
This selection is not obligatory, if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type desig-
nation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data acqui-
sition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and
SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with an under-
score (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction charac-
ter ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one
data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the autho-
rization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL
list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of the
selection list is taken from the existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters fol-
lowed by a number.
The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to
be included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user to this group can be defined afterwards by
the system manager with User Management pictures.
32
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
BAY_LR_IN_USE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the bay local/
remote-switch is in use, i.e. a physical switch exists.
By default the bay local/remote-switch is in use.
It is typical that if RTU 200 or RTU 210 is used as a remote
terminal unit, there is no bay local/remote-switches at bay
level. The control authority of a single bay is determined by
using station local/remote-switch only.
The process object for bay local/remote-switch is created
regardless of the selection. If the bay local/remote-switch is
NOT in use, the process object should be left as it is created,
i.e. switching state (SS) to manual and value (DB) as 2
(remote).
IND_DOUBLE_BINARY
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select, if the type of
the bay local/remote-switch indication is double binary. This
selection is being disabled and it has no meaning if the bay
local/remote-switch is not in use, i.e. BAY_LR_IN_USE is
not set.
Depending on the actual field device, the indication of the
local/remote-switch is sent either as a single binary (0/1) or
as a double binary (0/1/2/3) format.
Binary input:
0 = local
1 = remote
Double binary input:
0 = disabled (=control totally blocked)
1 = local
2 = remote
3 = none
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROL
LABLE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the bay local/
remote-switch can be controlled remotely by SCS/
MicroSCADA. This selection is being disabled and it has no
meaning if the bay local/remote-switch in not in use, i.e.
BAY_LR_IN_USE is not set.
By default, bay local/remote-switch is defined as manually
controllable only.
It is typical that if there is a remote control for bay local/
remote-switch, shift to local can be done remotely, whereas
shift from local to remote has to be performed locally. This
can be achieved by setting the attribute SS (switching state)
of the local command process object to OFF (0). By setting
the SS-attribute to 0, the relevant radio-button on dialog will
become insensitive for shifting.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
33
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
An optional named program which is designed for the optimi-
zation and/or customization purposes.
With this program it is possible to predefine logical names
for certain signals that are required by the bay main dialog.
By hard coding this information the opening time of the main
dialog is speeded up, since there is no need to look for cor-
responding objects from the process object database. It is
recommended to predefine the objects by this program if the
size of the process objectdatabase exceeds 10000 process
objects.
Signal to predefine: STATION_LN
The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.
Syntax for predefinitions:
Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by dialog
""
No process object(s) available and it is not required
"NONE"
Logical name (LN) for process objects
"GRB"
As an example, a typical predefinition for the common bay.
With the help of this program it is possible to define the logi-
cal name (LN) for other objects that are being required by
the main control dialogs. For syntax/selections, please refer
to the installation help!
This program is for optimization/customization purposes and
therefore, it is not obligatory. The control dialog is automati-
cally collecting the same information from the database if it
is not defined here.
@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-
STATION_LN = "GRB")
34
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
3.3.3.
Configuration with representation tool
The bay picture function has no attributes to configure with the Representation
Tool.
3.3.4.
Configuration with process object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the bay picture function, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects
which are going to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station
number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other
attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.
The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on the following list:
Table 3.3.4-1
Process objects based on this list are created with the
Process Object Tool
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Bay local/remote-switch
indication
The bay (disabled)/local/remote-switch is used to
determine whether the control to the bay objects
is completely inhibited or it is allowed locally or
remotely.
11
Bay local/remote -switch to
Disabled -command
The bay local/remote -switch to Disabled -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to disabled (no
control locally or remotely).
12
Bay local/remote -switch to
Local -command
The bay local/remote -switch to Local -command
object is an output object which is designed to set
the bay control to the local (panel).
13
Bay local/remote -switch to
Remote -command
The bay local/remote -switch to Remote -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to substation or
network control system (remote).
14
Bay local/remote -switch to
Reserved -command
The bay local/remote -switch to Reserved -
command object is an output object which is
designed to set the bay control to reserved. The
reserved position can be used for special
purposes.
15
External interlocking ON/OFF
(HW) -indication
(optional)
The external interlocking in use/out of use (HW) -
ind. is meant as an ON/OFF-type of indication for
the hardware switch of the interlocking function.
16
External interlocking ON/OFF
(SW) -indication
(optional)
The external interlocking in use/out of use (SW) -
ind. is meant as an ON/OFF-type of indication for
the software switch of the interlocking function.
17
External interlocking ON/OFF
-command
(optional)
The external interlocking in use/out of use -
command is an output object which can be used
to remotely enable/disable interlocking function of
the field device.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
35
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
An example of the bay configuration
As an example, the configuration of the bay picture function is provided:
Table 3.3.4-2
Configuration of the bay picture function
18
Internal interlocking ON/OFF
-indication
(optional)
The internal interlocking in use/out of use -
indication is meant as an ON/OFF-type of
indication of the internal interlocking functions. By
disabling internal interlocking, there will not be
any interlocking checking in the control dialogs
during operation.
19
Internal interlocking ON/OFF
-command
(optional)
The internal interlocking in use/out of use -
command is an object which is defined to
internally control the state of the internal
interlocking in use/out of use -indication.
20
Bay blockings
(optional)
The bay blockings -indication is an internal object
which is meant for generating events and
printouts of the bay blockings.
21
Bay selected on monitor
(optional)
The bay selected on monitor -indication is an
internal object and it is used to inform other users
that the bay dialog has been opened by another
user(s).
110
Bay local/remote-switch indi-
cation
Created only for ANSI and RTU type stations. For
ANSI it is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as an event recording object.
111-114,
117
Indication for command
termination
(optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether
the issued command was successful or not.
Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.
115
External interlocking ON/OFF
(HW)
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp)
with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
116
External interlocking ON/OFF
(SW)
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp)
with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Attribute
Value
Picture Function Name
BAY2
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Outgoing HA2
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
N/A
BAY_LABEL
HA2
P_OBJECT_LN
ESTHA02BAY
STATION_TYPE
RED 500 / REX (LON)
36
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
3.4.
Application engineering information
3.4.1.
The structure of the bay picture function
This chapter describes the structure of the bay picture function. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
bay is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.
The installation of the “instance” picture function will automatically install “type”
picture function (FPI_BAY2T) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture func-
tion contains all common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is only
visible in the Picture Editor.
3.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all bay pictures and a short description of their functionality.
Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 3.4.2-1
Bay pictures and descriptions of their functionalities
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 3.4.2-2
Bay pictures and descriptions of their funcitonalities
CMD_PARAMETER
N/A
OUTPUT_STATUS
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
REF541
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
BAY_LR_IN_USE
Yes
IND_DOUBLE_BINARY
Yes
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE
No
EVENT_RECORDING
N/A
Attribute
Value
Picture
Functionality
FPI_BAY2T.PIC
Common programs for all station picture functions
FPI_BAY2I.PIC
Picture function (5*2) for bay
Picture
Functionality
FPU_BAY2A.PIC
Main dialog
FPU_BAY2B.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_BAY2C.PIC
Update process data dialog
FPU_BAY2D.PIC
Bay blocking dialog
FPU_BAY2E.PIC
Relay selection dialog
FPU_BAY2F.PIC
Active object messages dialog
FPU_BAY2G.PIC
Bay interlocking dialog
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
37
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
3.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the bay pic-
ture function. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 3.4.3-1
Text translation tool compatible text files
3.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the bay help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/LANG0.
Table 3.4.4-1
Bay help text files
FPU_BAY2H.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_BAY2I.PIC
Combo-box list picture for alarm state dialog
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals
in MV Process
FORM4FPDB1.PIC
Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of signals
in MV Process
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process
Picture
Functionality
Text file
Functionality
FPI_BAY2.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FPU_BAY2.TXT
Text file for all bay dialogs
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type
of signals
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals
Help file
Functionality
FPI_BAY2.HLP
Picture function installation help file
FPU_BAY2A.HLP
Bay main dialog help file
FPU_BAY2C.HLP
Update process data dialog help file
FPU_BAY2D.HLP
Bay blocking dialog help file
FPU_BAY2E.HLP
Relay selection dialog help file
FPU_BAY2F.HLP
Active object messages dialog help file
FPU_BAY2G.HLP
Bay interlocking dialog help file
FPU_BAY2H.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
38
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
3.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the bay picture function. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 3.4.5-1
Configuration files used by the bay picture function
3.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the bay. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/USE.
Table 3.4.6-1
Text files used by the bay
3.4.7.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created depending on the configuration of the
bay.
Table 3.4.7-1
The manually operated bay local/remote-switch creates the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_BAY2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for a bay when it is created,
modified or deleted by configuration tools.
FPI_BAY2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used
by MV Process.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for installation tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog of the bay.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
Index Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB/BI
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
FPABAYILRS
15
BI
Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)
Hardware sw. (MFU)
Optional
FPABAYIINH
16
BI
Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)
Software sw. (MFU)
Optional
FPABAYIINH
17
BO
Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd
Command to MFU
Optional
FPABAYCINH
18
BI
Interl. in use/out of use Internal
Optional
FPABAYIINH
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
39
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
Table 3.4.7-2
The remotely controllable bay local/remote-switch creates the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool
19
BO
Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd
Internal
Optional
FPABAYCINH
20
AI
Blockings
Internal
Optional
FPABAYXBLK
21
AI
Bay selected on
monitor
Internal
Optional
FPABAYXMEV
110
EVREC
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
RP570 only
Optional
FPABAYELRS
110
AI
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
ANSI only
FPABAYELRS
115
EVREC
Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)
RP570 only
Optional
FPABAYEINH
116
EVREC
Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)
RP570 only
Optional
FPABAYEINH
117,
119
TERM
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only
Optional
FPASTATINH
Index Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group
identifier
10
DB/BI
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
FPABAYILRS
11
BO
L/R-sw. to Disabled -
command
Only if ind. type DB
FPABAYCLRS
12
BO
L/R-sw. to Local -
command
FPABAYCLRS
13
BO
L/R-sw. to Remote -
command
FPABAYCLRS
14
BO
L/R-sw. to Reserved -
command
Only if ind. type DB
FPABAYCLRS
15
BI
Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)
Hardware sw. (MFU)
Optional
FPABAYIINH
16
BI
Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)
Software sw. (MFU)
Optional
FPABAYIINH
17
BO
Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd
Command to MFU
Optional
FPABAYCINH
40
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
3.
Bay
Configuration Guide
3.4.8.
Scale Objects
At the first installation the bay creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For SPA-
COM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of the station, the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).
3.4.9.
Command procedures
At the first installation the bay creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function. It is also used by the Update process
data dialog.
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates bay local/remote-switch double
binary indication from an analog input.
18
BI
Interl. in use/out of use -
ind.
Internal
Optional
FPABAYIINH
19
BO
Interl. in use/out of use -
cmd
Internal
Optional
FPABAYCINH
20
AI
Blockings
Internal
Optional
FPABAYXBLK
21
AI
Bay selected on monitor
Internal
Optional
FPABAYXMEV
110
EVREC
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
RP570 only
Optional
FPABAYELRS
110
AI
Bay local/remote-switch
ind.
ANSI only
FPABAYELRS
111-
114
TERM/OS
Command termination
indication for output
signals
Output status object
IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only
Optional
Output status object
when station type is DNP
3.0, optional
FPASTATOBC
115
EVREC
Interl. in use/out of use
(HW)
RP570 only Optional
FPABAYEINH
116
EVREC
Interl. in use/out of use
(SW)-ind.
Only RP570 only
Optional
FPABAYEINH
117,
119
TERM
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101 and -103
only Optional
FPASTATINH
Index Obj.
type
Process
object
Remarks
Group
identifier
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
41
3. Bay
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
3
3.4.10.
Event channels
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
43
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
4. Switching
device
4.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/REX (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570) (*)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570) (*)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• MODBUS RTU
(*) When using the
53 protocol with switch device, the following constraints
should be taken into consideration: There are separate process objects used for
events and alarms. Due to this fact, intermediate and faulty events are not displayed
as alarming in the Event List (red alarm indicator is not displayed at the beginning
of the event line).
4.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process
switching device. The picture functions for the switching device is found in the
directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using
LIB4 installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Switching Device).
Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard
configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
4.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the switching device to have full functionality, the following
components need to be installed:
• Base
• Station (*)
• Bay (*)
(*) It is also possible to configure the switching device to operate without the station
and bay picture function. By default, however, the switching device requires them
to be installed.
1MRS751887-MEN
44
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
4.2.2.
Installation
There are three different sizes of the switching device picture function: small (1*1),
medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small switching device picture
function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function
is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x
60 pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.
It is not recommended that the medium size of the picture function is used within the
same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of the
feeder lines.
Fig. 4.2.2.-1 presents different kinds of switching device picture functions as a part
of the complete bay.
)LJ
7\SLFDOED\LQVWDOODWLRQZLWKGLIIHUHQWNLQGRIVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
Table 4.2.2-1
During the installation the following information has to be
given:
4.3.
Picture function configuration
4.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can begin, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention
Table 4.2.-1
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Picture Function Name
Name of the picture function within the picture
-
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
45
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
of the process object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. Please refer to the General chapter in this MV
Process Configuration Manual for further information.
4.3.2.
Configuration with the standard configuration tool
It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.
The switching device has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:
Table 4.3.2-1
Configurable attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
objects
-
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE
Type of switching device
Circuit breaker
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPO
SE
Usage of the selected switching device
type
Circuit breaker
SWITCH_SECTION
Switch section of the truck or 3-state
switch
Truck: first section
3-state sw.:
disconnector
STATION_TYPE
Type of control device & protocol
RED 500/REX
(LON)
INDICATION_TYPE
Type of position indication process
object
Double binary
MOTORIZED
Selection of motorized or manually
oper.
Motorized
CMD_PARAMETER
Parameter for control method for IEC
8750-5-101 and DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
CONTROL_TYPE
Type of control process object(s)
Secured control
with 4 binary
outputs
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status with
DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH
Length of control pulse
0
CONTROL_BITS
Bits to be used to send a control
command
Empty vector
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
Data acquisition unit towards process
None
FUNCTION_BLOCK
Function block of data acquisition unit
None
CHANNEL_NUMBER
Channel number of data acquisition
unit
0
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
Name of the authorization group
MV_CONTROL
SUFFIX_POSITION
Location of suffix
Lower right corner
46
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without a
button
With button
AUXILIARY_PLUG
Selection if the switching device is
mounted in the truck
Standalone
switch
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event recording
with RP 570
No process
objects
COMPACT_INSTALLATION
Selection if the switching device is
being installed over the busbar
Not installed over
busbar
U_INTERLOCKING
User-specific interlocking program
-
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
Program to define other objects
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Table 4.3.2-2
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the substation. By default, the maximum length of
the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum length of
the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar
to all objects within the same bay (feeder).
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name (identifier) of the switching device. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list
shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the switching device
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
47
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’ A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the switching device. By default, this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected switching device.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture function
has meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
switching device on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important to
have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined naming
convention it is possible to collect all station and bay related
database objects without searching through the complete
database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following naming
convention:
• The first three characters identify the substation
• The following four characters identify the bay
• The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is Green
Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
• GRB, station
• GRBHA12BAY, bay
• GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
• GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
• GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
• GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
• GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
• GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
• GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
• GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
• GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
• GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 2
• GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
Table 4.3.2-2
48
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
• GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
• GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
• GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program
U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYP
E
A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
switching device. By default, the type is a circuit breaker.
The configurable attribute has a great effect since it defines
the index range for process objects, the texts within database
and dialogs, the functionality and
methods on dialogs, etc. It is also used by the event and
alarm list when filtering certain types of switching devices.
Circuit breakers:
• Circuit breaker
• Circuit breaker with synchro-check
• Circuit breaker-disconnector (no full breaking
capasity)
Disconnectors:
• Disconnector
• Fuse switch
• Load breaking switch
Earth switch
Fault-making switch
Truck
Three-state switch
(needs to be set up by installing two picture functions)
Table 4.3.2-2
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
49
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PUR
POSE
A selector type of a combo box to select the purpose of the
switching device.
The configurable attribute has just an informative purpose
since by the default it is not used by any function within LIB
5xx. The attribute is being stored into process object
database (the 25
th
or the 26
th
character of the RX attribute)
for user-defined purposes, e.g. for special search condition
on the alarm or event list.
Circuit breakers:
• Circuit breaker
• Main busbar circuit breaker
• Main busbar A circuit breaker
• Main busbar B circuit breaker
• Reserve busbar circuit breaker
• By-pass circuit breaker
• Bus-section circuit breaker
• Bus-coupler circuit breaker
Disconnectors:
• Disconnector
• Main busbar disconnector
• Main busbar A disconnector
• Main busbar B disconnector
• Reserve busbar disconnector
Table 4.3.2-2
50
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
• By-pass disconnector
• Line disconnector
• Line disconnector A
• Line disconnector B
• Bus-section disconnector
• Bus-section A disconnector
• Bus-section B disconnector
• Bus-section C disconnector
• Bus-coupler disconnector
Earth switches:
• Earth switch
• Main busbar earth switch
• Main busbar A earth switch
• Main busbar B earth switch
• Reserve busbar earth switch
• By-pass earth switch
• Line earth switch
• Line earth switch A
• Line earth switch B
• CT-section earth switch
Fault-making switch
Truck
Three-state switch
SWITCH_SECTION
A selector type of a combo box to select the switch section for
the truck and the three-state switch. If
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is some other than truck or
three-state switch, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.
When the type of the switching device is truck, this
configurable attribute is needed to combine two picture
functions as one physical truck for Busbar Coloring. If there is
a circuit breaker with two truck picture functions, this attribute
should have a different value for both truck picture functions.
In that way the Busbar Coloring calculation algorithm knows
that the other picture function is not a duplicate but a part of
the other one.
Any of the two picture functions can be selected as the first
section as long as the other picture function is selected as the
second section of the truck. If only one picture function will be
used (i.e. one sided installation), the attribute can be left by
default.
As far as the three-state switch is concerned, this selection
will be used to identify whether the picture function is for the
disconnector section or for the earth switch section of the
three-state switch.
Table 4.3.2-2
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
51
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / Rex (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 60870-5-101
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If Rex device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/Rex
(LON).
INDICATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
position indication process object(s). By default, the process
object type is defined as a double indication (DB).
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to support other
data type than double indication as the position indication of
the switching device. The supported data types are:
Double indication (DB)
Single indication (BI)
2 x Single indications (2 x BI)
Analog input (AI)
The interface between the picture function and the process
object database is always with double indication object, i.e.
there is an additional process object(s) receiving information
and then passing it to double indication.
MOTORIZED
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the switching
device is motorized and remotely controllable by SCS/
MicroSCADA. By default, the switching device is defined as a
motorized object.
By selecting Motorized option, the Process Object Tool (POT)
will create a set of process objects for control purpose and all
configurable attributes related to control are being enabled.
CMD_PARAMETER
A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning only
if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected, otherwise
this attribute is being disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
Double command (TY = 46)
Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol and
Direct
Direct-No ack.
for DNP 3.0 protocol.
Table 4.3.2-2
52
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
CONTROL_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the control method
and the type of the control process object(s). If the
configurable attribute MOTORIZED is not selected, this
attribute is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to support other
control methods and process object types than the
conventional one. The conventional control method depends
very much on the configurable attribute STATION_TYPE
since there is a certain default method for each protocol to
control switching device. The supported control methods are:
Secured command with four binary outputs
(open select, close select, execute, cancel)
Secured command with two binary ouputs
(open execute, close execute)
Secured command with two digital outputs
(open execute, close execute; pulse length configurable)
Secured command with a single binary output (*)
(open select/close select/execute/cancel)
Secured command with a single analog output
(open select, close select, execute, cancel or open execute/
close execute)
Direct command with a single binary output
(open execute/close execute)
(*) Control method not supported with SPA and ANSI
protocols
A control device from SPACOM or RED 500 family with SPA
or LON protocol normally utilizes secured command with four
binary outputs.
Normally, A RTU 2xx with RP 570 uses secured command
with a single binary output.
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
CONTROL_PULSE_LENGT
H
An input field for integer value to set the pulse length of the
control pulses. The configurable attribute is being enabled if
the attribute MOTORIZED is set and CONTROL_TYPE is
secured control with two digital outputs.
CONTROL_BITS
A vector type of an input field for integer values to specify the
bits to be used to send a control command to the switching
device. The configurable attribute is being enabled if the
attribute MOTORIZED is set and CONTROL_TYPE is a
secured control with an analog output.
There is a need to specify two or four elements for that vector.
If two elements are being specified, the first element
represents the bit for Open execute, while the second
element is for Close execute. When four elements are used,
the first represents the bit for Open select, the second
repersents Close select, the third represents Execute and the
fourth represents Cancel.
The bit vector shall be given to the SCT in the following way:
(0,1) or (9,10,11,8)
Table 4.3.2-2
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
53
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the switching device.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than
one data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.
FUNCTION_BLOCK
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of data acquisition unit that
handles the signals for this picture function. If the configurable
attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT does not specify such a
device that contains function blocks, this attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
Devices such as REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilise function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new one),
you can enter it yourself!
CHANNEL_NUMBER
An input field for an integer value to set the channel number
of the switching device within the data acquisition unit. This
selection is only applicable for SPACOM type of the control
modules; for others this attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
SigTOOL needs a channel number for devices like SPTO
1C1, SPTO 1C4, SPTO 1D2, SPTO 1D5, SPTO 1D6, SPTO
2C2, SPTO 6D3 and SPTO 12D4.
Table 4.3.2-2
54
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of the
text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a
SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of
the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.
The name may not be composed of two letters followed
by a number.
The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization level
of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by the
system manager with the User Management pictures.
SUFFIX_POSITION
A selector type of combo box to select the position of the
suffix
for the switching device.
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to provide the
possibility to show the status of the switching device with
letters beside the symbol.
The supported positions for suffix are:
None
Upper right corner
Lower right corner
Lower left corner
Upper left corner
The configuration is done in the Application Settings picture,
depending on how the status of the switching device is
wanted to be shown: with suffices, with colors, or with both of
them.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the switching device.
By default the symbol is provided with an active button.
AUXILIARY_PLUG
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
device utilizes auxiliary plug or not. If the
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is truck or three-state switch,
the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.
The process object for an auxiliary plug informs if the control
cable from the switching device to the cubicle has been
disconnected, i.e. if the switching device is being fully racked
out from the cubicle. In that case no switching device symbol
is shown in the single line diagram.
The process object can also be used as an internal tag
without the process connection. In that case the control dialog
asks the auxiliary plug state when the object state is
intermediate.
Table 4.3.2-2
!
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
55
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.
COMPACT_INSTALLATION An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the switching
device is installed over the busbar (compact installation). If
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE is not any of disconnector
types, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if no topological busbar
coloring is used.
Table 4.3.2-2
56
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
U_INTERLOCKING
An optional named program which is designed for the internal
interlocking purpose.
With this internal interlocking program it is possible to make
control buttons insensitive if required. It is also capable of
generating interlocking cause messages to the information
bar of the control dialog.
As an example a simple interlocking program which checks if
the earth switch is open before allowing the control com-
mands for circuit breaker.
; By this program internal interlockings may be
; create by utilizing SCIL
;
; The following variables can be given as OUTPUT:
;
; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)
; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)
; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,
; text, cause to be shown on the dialog infobar
;
; None of these is obligatory!
;
;earth switch Q9 not open
#IF GRBHA12Q9:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK
#IF GRBHA12Q9:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = “Interlocked – Earth switch
Q9 not open”
#BLOCK_END
#BLOCK_END
#ELSE #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = “Interlocked – Earth switch
Q9 not updated”
#BLOCK_END
;If the status of the earth switch is changed when
;the main control dialogue is opened inform the
;operator about this change in the main control
;dialogoue.
#ON GRBHA12Q9:E10 #EXEC
'P_OBJECT_LN':E'EXT_OPEN_INTERLOCK_INDEX'
;Where P_OBJECT_LN is the logical name of database
;process object and EXT_OPEN_INTERLOCK_INDEX is the
;index nr (16) for the open interlocked
;processobject. If the P_OBJECT_LN is HA12Q0 the
;syntax would be #ON GRBHA12Q9:E10 #EXEC HA12Q0:E16.
Table 4.3.2-2
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
57
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
An optional named program which is designed for the optimi-
zation and/or customization purposes.
With this program it is possible to predefine logical names for
certain signals that are required by the main control dialog. By
hard coding this information, the opening time of the main dia-
log may be sped up since there is no need to look for the cor-
responding objects from the process object database. It is
recommended to predefine the objects by this program if the
size of the process object database exceeds 10000 process
objects.
Signals to predefine:
STATION_LN
The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.
BAY_LN
The logical name of the bay local/remote-switch, blocking
printout, external interlocking (hardware and software switch)
and internal interlocking. The BAY picture function creates
these process objects by default. Only one logical name is
allowed.
AR_LN
The logical name of the auto-reclosing in progress, auto-
reclosure in use (hardware switch), auto-reclosure in use
(software switch), auto-reclosure interruption and auto-reclo-
sure in use command. The RECLOSE TAG picture function
creates these process objects by default. It is also possible to
predefine process objects from auto-reclosing modules. Sev-
eral logical names as a vector are allowed. Not applicable for
other than the circuit breaker.
TRIP_LN
The logical name of the trip relay latched and latched relay
reset command. The TRIP TAG picture function creates these
process objects as a default. Several logical names as a vec-
tor are allowed. Not applicable for other than the circuit
breaker.
Syntax for predefinations:
Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by dialog
“”
No process object(s) available and it is not required
“NONE”
Logical name (LN) for process objects
“GRB”
Several logical names (LN) for process objects
VECTOR(“GRBHA01AR1”,”GRBHA01AR2”)
As an example a typical predefination for the switching
device.
Table 4.3.2-2
58
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
4.3.3.
Configuration with representation tool
The switching device has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:
Table 4.3.3-1
Configurable attributes
; By this program You can define logical name (LN)
for other objects
; that is being required by the main control dialogs.
For syntax/
; selections please refer to the installation help!
;
; This program is for optimization/customization
purposes and
; therefore it is not obligatory. The control dialog
is automatically
; collecting the same information from the database
if it is not
; defined here.
@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-
STATION_LN = “GRB”,-
BAY_LN = “GRBHA12BAY”,-
AR_LN = “GRBHA12AR”,-
TRIP_LN = “NONE”)
Table 4.3.2-2
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in picture
F_REPR/F_BREAK1 or
F_REPR/F_DISC1 or
F_REPR/F_TRUCK1
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the
switching device state indication. The name of the
representation can be selected with the selector called
Representation when the preview window shows an
example of the selected symbol set.
The representation is being reset if the type of the switching
device is changed.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied into a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and each representation may be modified as
needed. If object specific representations are needed, the
representation set (under the application) may be renamed
and the name of the representation may be written into the
selector with the logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
59
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-2
The switching device requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions
Selector Condition
Default color
0
Intermediate; selected, under command
white, blinking
1
Intermediate; selected on monitor
white
2
Intermediate; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow
magenta
3
Intermediate; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Intermediate; acknowledged alarm
red
5
Intermediate; warning or blockings (alarms, events,
printouts or reprocessing)
yellow
6
Intermediate; manually entered or substituted
cyan
7
Intermediate; control blocked
brown
8
Intermediate; normal state
green
9
Intermediate; Substituted
dark blue
10
Closed; selected, under command
white, blinking
11
Closed; selected on monitor
white
12
Closed; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow
magenta
13
Closed; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
14
Closed; acknowledged alarm
red
15
Closed; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
16
Closed; manually entered or substituted
cyan
17
Closed; control blocked
brown
18
Closed; normal state
green
19
Closed; Substituted
dark blue
20
Open; selected, under command
white, blinking
21
Open; selected on monitor
white
22
Open; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device
not synchronized or overflow
magenta
23
Open; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
24
Open; acknowledged alarm
red
25
Open; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
26
Open; manually entered or substituted
cyan
27
Open; control blocked
brown
28
Open; normal state
green
29
Open; Substituted
dark blue
30
Faulty; selected, under command
white, blinking
31
Faulty; selected on monitor
white
32
Faulty; update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value,
device not synchronized or overflow
magenta
60
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
By default, there are nine sets of symbols in three different sizes for each switching
device type. These default representations are shown below as medium sized. Please
note that in actual system the symbols representing selectors 0, 3, 10, 13, 20, 23, 30,
33 and 40 are blinking to draw attention.
Fig. 4.3.3.-1 presents the available square symbols for the circuit breaker.
Table 4.3.3-3
Square symbols
)LJ
6TXDUHV\PEROVIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-2 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the circuit
breaker.
33
Faulty; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
34
Faulty; acknowledged alarm
red
35
Faulty; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
36
Faulty; manually entered or substituted
cyan
37
Faulty; control blocked
brown
38
Faulty; normal state
green
39
Faulty; Substituted
dark blue
40
Unknown; selected, under command
white, blinking
41
Unknown; selected on command
white
42
Unknown; not sampled or object missing
magenta
Selector Condition
Default color
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK1
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM1
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL1
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
61
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-4
Vertical link upwards symbol
)LJ
9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-3 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the circuit
breaker.
Table 4.3.3-5
Horizontal link to the right symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK2
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM2
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL2
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK3
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM3
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL3
large
62
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ
+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-4 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the circuit
breaker.
Table 4.3.3-6
Horizontal link to the left symbol
)LJ
+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-5 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the circuit
breaker.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK4
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM4
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL4
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
63
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-7
Vertical link downwards symbol
)LJ
9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-6 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols of contactor for
the circuit breaker.
Table 4.3.3-8
Vertical link upwards symbol
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK5
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM5
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL5
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK6
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM6
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL6
large
64
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ
9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-7 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.
Table 4.3.3-9
Horizontal link to the right symbols
)LJ
+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLW
EUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-8 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK7
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM7
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL7
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
65
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-10 Horizontal link to the left symbols
)LJ
+RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLW
EUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-9 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols of contactor
for the circuit breaker.
Table 4.3.3-11 Vertical link downwards symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK8
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM8
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL8
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_BREAK9
small
F_REPR/F_BREAKM9
medium
F_REPR/F_BREAKL9
large
66
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ
9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGV\PEROVRIFRQWDFWRUIRUWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
Fig. 4.3.3.-10 presents the available diamond symbols for the disconnector.
Table 4.3.3-12 Diamond symbols
)LJ 'LDPRQGV\PEROVIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-11 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the discon-
nector.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC1
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM1
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL1
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
67
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-13 Vertical link upwards symbols
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-12 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the
disconnector.
Table 4.3.3-14 Horizontal link to the right symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC2
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM2
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL2
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC3
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM3
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL3
large
68
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-13 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the dis-
connector.
Table 4.3.3-15 Horizontal link to the left symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-14 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the
disconnector.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC4
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM4
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL4
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
69
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-16 Vertical link downwards
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHGLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-15 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols of load breaking
switch.
Table 4.3.3-17 Vertical link upwards symbol
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC5
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM5
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL5
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC6
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM6
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL6
large
70
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH
GLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-16 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols of load
breaking switch for the disconnector.
Table 4.3.3-18 Horizontal link to the right symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH
GLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-17 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols of load
breaking switch.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC7
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM7
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL7
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
71
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-19 Horizontal link to the left symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH
GLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-18 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols of load
breaking switch.
Table 4.3.3-20 Vertical link downwards symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC8
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM8
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL8
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_DISC9
small
F_REPR/F_DISCM9
medium
F_REPR/F_DISCL9
large
72
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROVRIORDGEUHDNLQJVZLWFKIRUWKH
GLVFRQQHFWRU
Fig. 4.3.3.-19 presents the available vertical link
downwards symbol for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-21 Vertical link downwards symbol
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-20 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the truck.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK1
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM1
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL1
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
73
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-22 Vertical link upwards symbols
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-21 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-23 Horizontal link to the right symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK2
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM2
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL2
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK3
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM3
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL3
large
74
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-22 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-24 Horizontal link to the left symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-23 presents the available vertical link downwards symbols for the truck.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK4
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM4
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL4
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
75
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-25 Vertical link downwards symbols
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNGRZQZDUGVV\PEROIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-24 presents the available vertical link upwards symbols for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-26 Vertical link upwards symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK5
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM5
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL5
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK6
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM6
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL6
large
76
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ 9HUWLFDOOLQNXSZDUGVV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-25 presents the available horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-27 Horizontal link to the right symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHULJKWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-26 presents the available horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK7
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM7
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL7
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
77
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.3-28 Horizontal link to the left symbols
)LJ +RUL]RQWDOOLQNWRWKHOHIWV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN
Fig. 4.3.3.-27 presents the available circle symbols for the truck.
Table 4.3.3-29 Circle symbols
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK8
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM8
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL8
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_TRUCK9
small
F_REPR/F_TRUCKM9
medium
F_REPR/F_TRUCKL9
large
78
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
)LJ &LUFOHV\PEROVIRUWKHWUXFN
4.3.4.
Configuration with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the switching device, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects into the database. Those process objects
which are going be linked to actual process should be edited to have a station
number, an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise by default all other
attributes should have suitable values for normal operation.
Table 4.3.4-1
The Process Object Tool will create process objects for circuit
breaker, disconnector and earth switch based on the following
list.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Position indication
Used for position indication of the switching device
state open/closed/ intermediate/faulty
11
Open select or open
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.
12
Close select or close
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.
13
Execute selected or
select open/close and
execute/cancel
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel to the control unit.
14
Cancel command
Used for sending Cancel command to the control unit.
15
External control blocking
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.
16
Open interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.
17
Close interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
79
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.3.4-2
The Process Object Tool will create process objects for truck
based on the following list.
18
Interlocking cause
(optional)
Receives an interlocking cause i.e. an integer value that
represents a reason for an unsuccessful control action.
19
Selected on monitor
(optional)
An internal tag that shows if the switching device is
being selected on different picture(s) or monitor(s).
20
Command event
(optional)
An internal or external tag that shows if the switching
device is right under command sequence.
21
Auxiliary plug state
(optional)
An internal or external tag to indicate if the switching
device is being fully racked out from cubicle and
therefore, it should not be shown in the single line
diagram.
(108)
110
Position indication other
type than double
indication
Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)
111-114 Indication for command
termination or indication
for output status
(optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.
With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.
115
External control blocking
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
116
Open interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
117
Close interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
120
Command event
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
121
Auxiliary plug state
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
(208)
210
Position indication other
type than double
indication
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Index
Explanation
Purpose
30
Position indication
Used for position indication of the truck state open/
closed/ intermediate/faulty
31
Open select or Open
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.
32
Close select or Close
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.
33
Execute selected or
Select open/close and
Execute/Cancel
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel to the control unit.
34
Cancel command
Used for sending Cancel command to the control unit.
80
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
Table 4.3.4-3
The Process Object Tool will create process objects for three
state switch based on the follwing list.
35
External control blocking
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.
36
Open interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.
37
Close interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.
38
Interlocking cause
(optional)
Receives an interlocking cause i.e. an integer value that
represents a reason for an unsuccessful control action.
39
Selected on monitor
(optional)
An internal tag that shows if the truck is being selected
on different picture(s) or monitor(s).
40
Command event
(optional)
An internal or external tag that shows if the truck is right
under command sequence.
(128)
130
Position indication other
type than double
indication
Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)
131-
134
Indication for command
termination or indication
for output status
(optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.
With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.
135
External control blocking
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
136
Open interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
137
Close interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
140
Command event
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
(228)
230
Position indication other
type than double
indication
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Position indication
(disconnector section)
Used for position indication of the three-state switch
state open/closed/ intermediate/faulty
11
Position indication
(earth switch section)
Used for position indication of the three-state switch
state free/earthed/ intermediate/faulty
12
Open select or Open
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Open select or Open execute to the control
unit.
13
Close select or Close
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Close select or Close execute to the control
unit.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
81
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
14
Free select or Free
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Free select or Free execute to the control unit.
15
Earth select or Earth
execute
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Earth select or Earth execute” to the control
unit.
16
Execute selected or
select open/close and
execute/cancel
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Execute or Select open/close and Execute/
Cancel of disconnector section to the control unit.
17
Cancel selected or select
free/earth and execute/
cancel
Depending on the defined control type it is used for
sending Cancel or Select free/earth and Execute/
Cancel of earth switch section to the control unit.
18
External control blocking
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal from the control unit
and prevents the control actions in the single line
diagram.
19
Open interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Open command
from the control unit and prevents the Open command
in the single line diagram.
20
Close interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Close command
from the control unit and prevents the Close command
in the single line diagram.
21
Free interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Free command
from the control unit and prevents the Free command in
the single line diagram.
22
Earth interlocked
(optional)
Receives a control blocking signal for Earth command
from the control unit and prevents the Earth command in
the single line diagram.
23
Interlocking cause
(optional)
Receives an interlocking cause for disconnector section
i.e. an integer value that represents a reason for an
unsuccessful control action.
24
Interlocking cause
(optional)
Receives an interlocking cause for earth switch section
i.e. an integer value that represents a reason for an
unsuccessful control action.
25
Selected on monitor
(optional)
An internal tag that shows if the switching device is
being selected on different picture(s) or monitor(s).
26
Command event
(optional)
An internal or external tag that shows if the switching
device is right under command sequence.
(108)
110
Position indication other
type than double
indication
(disconnector section)
Receives position indication as single indication (110),
analog input (110) or two single indications (110-open,
108-close)
(109)
111
Position indication other
type than double
indication
(earth switch section)
Receives position indication as single indication (111),
analog input (111) or two single indications (111-open,
109-close)
112-
117
Indication for command
termination or indication
for output status
(optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not
With DNP 3.0 indicates the status of output object.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
82
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
4.3.5.
An Example of the switching device configuration
The configuration of the switching device as a circuit breaker can be given as an
example:
Table 4.3.5-1
Configuration of the switching device as a circuit breaker
118
External control blocking
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
119
Open interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
120
Close interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
121
Free interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
122
Earth interlocked
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
126
Command event
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
(208)
210
Position indication other
type than double
indication
(disconnector section)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
(209)
211
Position indication other
type than double
indication
(earth switch section)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Attribute
Value
Picture Function Name
CB1
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Outgoing HA2
DEVICE_NAME
Q0
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
N/A
P_OBJECT_LN
ESTHA02Q0
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE
Circuit breaker
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE
Main busbar circuit breaker
SWITCH_SECTION
N/A
STATION_TYPE
RED 500 / REX (LON)
INDICATION_TYPE
Double binary
MOTORIZED
Yes
CMD_PARAMETER
N/A
CONTROL_TYPE
Secured control with 4 binary outputs
OUTPUT_STATUS
N/A
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
83
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
4.4.
Application engineering information
4.4.1.
The structure of the switching device
This chapter describes the structure of the switching device. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
switching device function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST,
LANG0 and USE.
The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_SSWT) if it does not already
exist. The “type” picture function contains all common programs for the “instance”
picture function and it is only visible at the Picture Editor.
4.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all switching device pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 4.4.2-1
Switching device pictures
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH
N/A
CONTROL_BITS
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
REF541
FUNCTION_BLOCK
COCB1-B
CHANNEL_NUMBER
N/A
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
SUFFIX_POSITION
Disabled by Application Settings picture
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Yes
AUXILIARY_PLUG
No
EVENT_RECORDING
N/A
COMPACT_INSTALLATION
N/A
U_INTERLOCKING
-
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
-
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_BREAK2 (vertical link)
Attribute
Value
Picture
Functionality
FPI_SSWT.PIC
Common programs for all switching device picture functions
FPI_SSWI_S.PIC
Small picture function (1*1) for switching device
FPI_SSWI_M.PIC
Medium picture function (2*2) for switching device
FPI_SSWI_L.PIC
Large picture function (3*3) for switching device
84
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
Table 4.4.2-2
Switching device pictures
4.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the switching
device. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 4.4.3-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
Picture
Functionality
FPU_SSWA.PIC
Main control dialog
FPU_SSWB.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_SSWC.PIC
Forced operation dialog
FPU_SSWD.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_SSWE.PIC
Combo box list picture for alarm state dialog
FPU_SSWF.PIC
Blocking dialog
FPU_SSWG.PIC
Normal state setting dialog
FPU_SSWH.PIC
Combo box list picture for normal state setting
FPU_SSWI.PIC
Operation counting dialog
FPU_SSWJ.PIC
Active object messages dialog
FPU_SSWK.PIC
Position simulation dialog
FPU_SSWL.PIC
Auto-reclosing control dialog
FPU_SSWM.PIC
Latched relay reset dialog
FPU_SSWO.PIC
Auxiliary plug question dialog
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPDB1.PIC
Format picture for printing double indication (DB) type of signals
in MV Process
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPDO1.PIC
Format picture for printing digital output (DO) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPAO1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog output (AO) type of signals in
MV Process
Text file
Functionality
FPI_SSW.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FPU_SSW.TXT
Text file for all switching device dialogs
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type of
signals
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing double indication (DB) type
of signals
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
85
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
4.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the switching device help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 4.4.4-1
Switching device help text files
4.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the switching device. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 4.4.5-1
Switching device configuration files
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals
FORM4FPDO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing digital output (DO) type of
signals
FORM4FPAO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog output (AO) type of
signals
Text file
Functionality
Help file
Functionality
FPI_SSW.HLP
Picture function installation help file
FPU_SSWA.HLP
Main control dialog help file
FPU_SSWC.HLP
Forced operation dialog help file
FPU_SSWD.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
FPU_SSWF.HLP
Blocking dialog help file
FPU_SSWG.HLP
Normal state setting dialog help file
FPU_SSWI.HLP
Operation counting dialog help file
FPU_SSWJ.HLP
Active object messages dialog help file
FPU_SSWK.HLP
Position simulation dialog help file
FPU_SSWL.HLP
Auto-reclosing control dialog help file
FPU_SSWM.HLP
Latched relay reset dialog help file
FPU_SSWO.HLP
Auxiliary plug question dialog help file
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_SSW.DAT
Contains the configuration data for switching device when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.
FPI_SSW.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.
FPI_FB.TXT
Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions
for the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions,
too.)
86
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
4.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the switching device. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 4.4.6-1
Switching device text files
4.4.7.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created depending on the type of the switching
device.
Table 4.4.7-1
The manually operated circuit breaker, disconnector or earth
switch will create the following process objects with the
Process Object Tool
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for the switching device.
FPU_SW_SEL.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Open or Close selection
command to the switching device. This code is executed by the
main control dialog.
FPU_SW_EXE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Execute command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.
FPU_SW_CAN.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Cancel command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Position indication
FPQxxxIPOS
19
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQxxxXMEV
21
BI
Auxialiry plug indication
Optional
FPQxxxIAUX
108
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQxxxEPOS
110
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQxxxEPOS
110
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
87
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Three characters (xxx) in the group identifier is being replaced by other characters
based on the selection made with configurable attributes
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE and SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE.
Table 4.4.7-2
The motorized circuit breaker, disconnector or earth switch
will create the following process objects with the Process
Object Tool
121
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
auxiliary plug indication
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEAUX
208
EVREC
BI
Event recording for close
position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
210
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
!
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Position indication
FPQxxxIPOS
11
BO
Open command or Open
execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQxxxCOBC
12
BO
Close command or
Close execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQxxxCOBC
13
BO
Execute command or
Open/Close select and
Execute/Cancel cmd
Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO
Direct control with BO
FPQxxxCOBC
14
BO
Cancel command
Sec. control with
4xBO
FPQxxxCOBC
15
BI
External control blocking Optional
FPQxxxIBLK
16
BI
External interlock for
open cmd
Optional
FPQxxxIINH
17
BI
External interlock for
close cmd
Optional
FPQxxxIINH
18
AI
External interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQxxxIINH
19
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQxxxXMEV
20
BI
Object command event
Optional
FPQxxxICEV
21
BI
Auxialiry plug indication Optional
FPQxxxIAUX
108
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQxxxEPOS
88
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
Three characters (xxx) in the group identifier is being replaced by other characters
based on the selection made with configurable attributes
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE and SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE.
Table 4.4.7-3
The manually operated truck will create the following process
objects with the Process Object Tool
110
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQxxxEPOS
110
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
111-114
TERM/OS
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only
Optional
FPQxxxTOBC
115
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external control blocking
Only RP570
Optional
FPQxxxEBLK
116
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQxxxEINH
117
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQxxxEINH
120
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
object command event
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxECEV
121
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
auxiliary plug indication
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEAUX
208
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
close position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
210
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only Optional
FPQxxxEPOS
252
AI
Calculated interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQxxxIINH
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
!
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
30
DB
Position indication
FPQT01IPOS
39
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQT01XMEV
128
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQT01EPOS
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
89
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.4.7-4
The motorized truck will create the following process objects
with the Process Object Tool
130
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQT01EPOS
130
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
228
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
close position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
230
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
30
DB
Position indication
FPQT01IPOS
31
BO
Open command or Open
execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQT01COBC
32
BO
Close command or
Close execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQT01COBC
33
BO
Execute command or
Open/Close select and
Execute/Cancel cmd
Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO
Direct control with BO
FPQT01COBC
34
BO
Cancel command
Sec. control with
4xBO
FPQT01COBC
35
BI
External control blocking Optional
FPQT01IBLK
36
BI
External interlock for
open cmd
Optional
FPQT01IINH
37
BI
External interlock for
close cmd
Optional
FPQT01IINH
38
AI
External interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQT01IINH
39
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQT01XMEV
40
BI
Object command event
Optional
FPQT01ICEV
128
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQT01EPOS
130
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQT01EPOS
130
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
90
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
Table 4.4.7-5
The manually operated three-state switch will create the
following process objects with the Process Object Tool
131-134 TERM
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only
Optional
FPQxxxTOBC
135
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external control blocking
Only RP570
Optional
FPQT01EBLK
136
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQT01EINH
137
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQT01EINH
140
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
object command event
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01ECEV
228
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
close position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
230
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQT01EPOS
251
AI
Calculated interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQT01IINH
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Position indication
Disconnector section
FPQ301IPOS
11
DB
Position indication
Earth switch section
FPQ301IPOS
25
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQ301XMEV
108
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
Disconnector section
FPQ301EPOS
109
BI
Earth position indication Indication type 2xBI
Earth switch section
FPQ301EPOS
110
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
Disconnector section
FPQ301EPOS
111
BI or AI
Position indication or
free position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
Earth switch section
FPQ301EPOS
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
91
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
Table 4.4.7-6
The motorized three-state switch will create the following
process objects with the Process Object Tool
110
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
111
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
208
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
close position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
209
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
earth position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
210
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
211
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
free position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Position indication
Disconnector section
FPQ301IPOS
11
DB
Position indication
Earth switch section
FPQ301IPOS
12
BO
Open command or
Open execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQ301COBC
13
BO
Close command or
Close execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQ301COBC
14
BO
Free command or Free
execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQ301COBC
15
BO
Earth command or
Earth execute
Sec. control with
4xBO, 2xBO or 2xDO
FPQ301COBC
16
BO
Execute command or
open/close select and
execute/ cancel cmd
Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO
Direct control with BO
FPQ301COBC
92
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
17
BO
Cancel command or
free/earth select and
execute/cancel cmd
Sec. control with
4xBO, BO or AO
Direct control with BO
FPQ301COBC
18
BI
External control
blocking
Optional
FPQ301IBLK
19
BI
External interlock for
open cmd
Optional
FPQ301IINH
20
BI
External interlock for
close cmd
Optional
FPQ301IINH
21
BI
External interlock for
free cmd
Optional
FPQ301IINH
22
BI
External interlock for
earth cmd
Optional
FPQ301IINH
23
AI
External inter-locking
cause
Optional
FPQ301IINH
24
AI
External interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQ301IINH
25
AI
Object selected on
monitor
Optional
FPQ301XMEV
26
BI
Object command event Optional
FPQ301ICEV
108
BI
Close position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQ301EPOS
109
BI
Earth position indication Indication type 2xBI
FPQ301EPOS
110
BI or AI
Position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQ301EPOS
111
BI or AI
Position indication or
free position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI FPQ301EPOS
110
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB RP
570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
111
EVREC
DB
Event recording for
position indication
Indication type DB RP
570 only Optional
FPQ301EPOS
112-117 TERM
Command termination
indication for output
signals
IEC 870-5-101 and -
103 only
Optional
FPQxxxTOBC
118
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external control blocking
Only RP570
Optional
FPQ301EBLK
119
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
open cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQ301EINH
120
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
close cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQ301EINH
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
93
4. Switching device
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
4
4.4.8.
Scale objects
At the first installation the circuit breaker creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
indication type of analog input the installation will also create the scale
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).
4.4.9.
Command procedures
At the first installation the switching device creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.
For the indication type of single indication (BI), the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_BI2DB, which updates position indication double binary
from a binary input.
For the indication type of an analog input (AI), the installation will create the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB, which updates position indication double binary
from an analog input.
121
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
free cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQ301EINH
122
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
external interlock for
earth cmd
Only RP570
Optional
FPQ301EINH
126
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
object command event
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301ECEV
208
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
close position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
209
EVREC
BI
Event recording for
earth position indication
Indication type 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
210
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
open position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
211
EVREC
BI or AI
Event recording for
position indication or
free position indication
Ind. type AI, BI or 2xBI
RP 570 only
Optional
FPQ301EPOS
251
AI
Calculated interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQ301IINH
252
AI
Calculated interlocking
cause
Optional
FPQ301IINH
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
94
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
4.
Switching device
Configuration Guide
For the indication type of two single indication (2xBI), the installation will create
the command procedures FPU_2BI2DB and FPU_SETDB, which are used to
update position indication double binary from two binary inputs.
4.4.10.
Event channels
For the indication type of a single indication (BI), the installation will create the
event channel FPU_BI2DB, which is set to activate command procedure
FPU_BI2DB.
For the indication type of an analog input (AI), the installation will create the event
channel FPU_AI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB.
For the indication type of two single indications (2xBI), the installation will create
the event channel FPU_2BI2DB, which is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_2BI2DB.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
95
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
5. Measurements
5.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/REX (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• MODBUS RTU
5.2.
Picture function installation
This document describes the picture function of the MV Process measurement. The
picture function for Measurement is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Measurement). Configuration of this
picture function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
5.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the measurement to have full functionality, the following components
need to be installed:
• Base
• Station (*)
• Bay (*)
(*) It is also possible to configure the measurement to operate without the station and
bay picture function. By default, however, the measurement picture function
requires them to be installed.
5.2.2.
Installation
There are three different sizes (small, medium and large) of each measurement type
(measurement without a field, with a horizontal field and with a vertical bar
presentation).
The size of the small measurement without field is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1
semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3
semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.
1MRS751887-MEN
96
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
As a minimum, the measurement with a horizontal field requires the following area:
the small picture function 80 x 20 pixels (5 x 1 semigraphical blocks), the medium
picture function 96 x 40 pixels (6 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture
function 112 x 60 pixels (7 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The size in a vertical direction
depends on how many measurements are connected to the picture function. The
button frame is drawn out of this area.
The size of the small measurement with a vertical bar presentation is 16 x 80 pixels
(1 x 4 semigraphical blocks), the medium picture function is 32 x 100 pixels (2 x 5
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 120 pixels (3 x 6
semigraphical blocks). The size in a horizontal direction depends on how many
measurements are connected to the picture function. The button frame is drawn out
of this area.
It is
QRW recommended to use the medium size of the picture function within the
same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of the
feeder lines.
Fig. 5.2.2.-1 presents all three different types of measurement picture functions in
typical installations.
)LJ
7\SLFDOPHDVXUHPHQWLQVWDOODWLRQV
Table 5.2.2-1
During the installation, the following information has to be
given
5.3.
Picture function configuration
5.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention
of the process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. For more information, please refer to the
General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.
5.3.2.
Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool
It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.
The measurement picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Standard Configuration Tool:
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Picture Function Name
Name of the picture function within the picture
-
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
97
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
Table 5.3.2-1
Configurable measurement picture function attributes
(*) Configurable attribute exists only for the measurement with a horizontal field
(**) Configurable attribute exists only for the measurement with bar presentation
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier
‘nr’
Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database
process objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device &
protocol
RED 500/REX (LON)
TYPE_MEAS_’number’
The type of the measurement
None
FOLDER_’number_TITLE
Abbreviation of the
measurement
-
MEAS_’number_DECIMALS
Decimals used for presenting
the value
0
(*/**) SHOW_MEAS_´number’
Selection if the value is shown
on the display
No
(*)
SHOW_MEAS_´number’AS_BAR
Selection if the value is shown
with digits or bar
Digits
(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT
Selection if the measurement
is shown with unit
Without unit
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’num
ber’
Data acquisition unit towards
process
-
FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’
Function block of data
acquisition unit
-
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization
group
MV_CONTROL
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or
without a button
With button
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event
recording with RP 570
No process objects
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
Program to define other
objects
-
98
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
measurement objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
measurement objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the measurement. By
default, the maximum length of the text is 5 characters.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the measurement
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
99
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’numbe
r’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter a special identifier of the measurement. By default,
this identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with
the SCT. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected measurement. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
measurement on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:
The first three characters identify the substation
The following four characters identify the bay
The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:
GRB, station
GRBHA12BAY, bay
GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 2
100
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it
usually takes a longer time to open the main control
dialogs unless the optional named program
U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus
via LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/
REx (LON).
TYPE_MEAS_’number’
The type of the measurement. The type identifies the
measurement for the creation of database (indexes,
object texts, units ..). In case no suitable alternative can
be found, the indexes 27..37 can be used. The indexes
27 .. 32 are for user-defined analog (AI) objects, and the
indexes 33 .. 37 are for user-defined pulse counter (PC)
objects.
NOTE!
THE DATABASE OBJECTS WILL NOT BE CREATED
UNTIL THE PROCESS OBJECT TOOL HAS BEEN
USED TO CREATE THEM.
FOLDER_’number’_TITLE
The name of the measurement to be shown in the
measurement dialog. Attribute is optional, if it is not given,
the measurement is referred to as "Meas. ’number’" in the
dialog.
If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
101
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
MEAS_’number’_DECIMALS
The number of decimals used when presenting the
measurement value in the dialog.
If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
(*/**)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’
States if the measurement is to be shown by default when
the picture is opened.
If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
(*)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_B
AR
Shows the measurement as a bar when it is shown.
If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
(*)
SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT
Shows the measurements unit, when it is shown. The unit
is read from the database.
If the configurable attribute TYPE_MEAS_’number’ is not
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’nu
mber’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
data acquisition unit of the measurement ’number’.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the
communication system, can be defined either by selecting
the unit from the selection list and editing it or just by
entering the type designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the
same type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate
units by using additional characters. As an example, the
data acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC
535 C3 and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1- 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more
than one data acquisition unit of the same type within the
bay, the additional characters can be left out.
102
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of data acquisition unit
that handles the signals for this picture function. If the
configurable attribute
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT’number’ does not specify
such a device that contains function blocks, this attribute
is being disabled, and the value has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
Devices such as REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC
53x utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of
the function block does not exist in the selection list (a
new one), you may enter it yourself!
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable
as a SCIL list attribute name (see the SCIL manual). The
contents of the selection list is taken from the existing
authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.
The attribute needs to be defined, if the object is wanted
to be included in some authorization group. The
authorization level of each user in this group can be
defined afterwards by the system manager with User
Management pictures.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the measurements.
By default the symbol is provided with an active button.
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is a need for event recording process objects with
the RP 570 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU
2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device
comes into the event recording process object. If no
accurate time stamp is needed or available, or the device
is emulating the RP 570 without an event recording
possibility, do not set this attribute ON.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
103
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
An optional named program which is designed for the
optimization and/or customization purposes.
With this program it is possible to predefine logical names
for certain signals that are required by the main control
dialog. By hard coding this information the opening time
of the main dialog can be speeded up since there is no
need to look for the corresponding objects from the
process object database. It is recommended to predefine
the objects with the help of this program if the size of the
process object database exceeds 10000 process objects.
Signals to predefine:
STATION_LN
The logical name of the station local/remote-switch. The
STATION picture function creates this process object by
default. Only one logical name is allowed.
BAY_LN
The logical name of the bay local/remote-switch, blocking
printout, external interlocking (hardware and software
switch) and internal interlocking. The BAY picture function
creates these process objects by default. Only one logical
name is allowed.
Syntax for predefinations:
Not predefined; search for process object(s) done by
dialog
""
No process object(s) available and it is not required
"NONE"
Logical name (LN) for process objects
"GRB"
As an example, a typical predefinition for the switching
device.
; The logical name (LN) for other objects that
are
; being required by the main control dialogs can
be
; defined with the help of this program. For
syntax/
; selections, please refer to the installation
help!
;
; This program is for optimization/customization
; purposes and therefore, it is not obligatory.
The
; control dialog is automatically collecting the
same
; information from the database if it is not
defined
; here.
@’.ID’_OTHER_OBJECTS = LIST(-
STATION_LN = "GRB",-
BAY_LN = "GRB_HA12BAY")
104
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
5.3.3.
Configuration with the Representation Tool
The measurement picture function has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:
Table 5.3.3-1
Configurable attributes
Table 5.3.3-2
The measurement requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions
By default, there are nine sets of symbols in three different sizes for measurement
picture function. These default representations are shown below as medium sized.
Please note that in the actual system the symbol representing selector 3 is blinking
to draw attention.
Fig. 5.3.3.-1 presents the circle symbol for the measurement.
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in the picture
F_REPR/F_MEAS1(filled circle)
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the
measurement indication. The predefined representation can
be selected from the selector type of list called Library
Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/ APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and modify each representation as needed. If
object specific representations are needed, the
representation set (under the application) can be renamed
and the name of the representation can be written into the
selector with the logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Selector
Condition
Default color
1
Selected on monitor
white
2
Update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
3
Unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Acknowledged alarm
red
5
Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts
or reprocessing)
yellow
6
Manually entered
cyan
7
Normal state
green
8
Substituted
Dark blue
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
105
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
Table 5.3.3-3
Circle symbol for the measurement
)LJ
&LUFOHV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Fig. 5.3.3.-2- Fig. 5.3.3.-7 present voltage transducer symbols for the measurement.
Table 5.3.3-4
Voltage transducer 1 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-5
Voltage transducer 2 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQWW
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS1
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM1
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL1
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS2
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM2
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL2
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS3
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM3
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL3
large
106
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
Table 5.3.3-6
Voltage transducer 3 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQWW
Table 5.3.3-7
Voltage transducer 4 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-8
Voltage transducer 5 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS4
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM4
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL4
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS5
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM5
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL5
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS6
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM6
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL6
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
107
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
Table 5.3.3-9
Voltage transducer 6 for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Fig. 5.3.3.-8 - Fig. 5.3.3.-10 present miscallenous symbols for the measurement.
Table 5.3.3-10 Current symbol for the measurement
)LJ
&XUUHQWV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-11 Voltage symbol for the measurement
)LJ
9ROWDJHV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS7
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM7
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL7
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS8
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM8
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL8
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS9
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM9
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL9
large
108
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
Table 5.3.3-12 Active power symbol for the measurement
)LJ $FWLYHSRZHUV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-13 Reactive power symbol for the measurement
)LJ 5HDFWLYHSRZHUV\PEROIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Fig. 5.3.3.-12- Fig. 5.3.3.-15 present current transducer symbols for the
measurement.
Table 5.3.3-14 Current transducer 1 for the measurement
)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS10
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM10
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL10
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS11
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM11
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL11
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS12
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM12
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL12
large
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
109
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
Table 5.3.3-15 Current transducer 2 for the measurement
)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-16 Current transducer 3 for the measurement
)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Table 5.3.3-17 Current transducer 4 for the measurement
)LJ &XUUHQWWUDQVGXFHUIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQW
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS13
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM13
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL13
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS14
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM14
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL14
large
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_MEAS15
small
F_REPR/F_MEASM15
medium
F_REPR/F_MEASL15
large
110
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
5.3.4.
Configuration with Process Object Tool
Depending on the measurement configuration, the Process Object Tool will create a
certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which are going
to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.
Table 5.3.4-1
Process objects
Index Explanation
Purpose
10
Current L1
Current measurement on phase L1
11
Current L2
Current measurement on phase L2
12
Current L3
Current measurement on phase L3
13
Neutral current I0
Neutral current measurement
14
Directional neutral current Ij
Directional neutral current measurement
15
Maximum demand I15min
Current measurement of 15 minutes
maximum demand
16
Voltage U12
Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L1-L2
17
Voltage U23
Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L2-L3
18
Voltage U31
Phase to phase voltage measurement on
phases L3-L1
19
Residual voltage U0
Residual voltage measurement
20
Active power P
Active power measurement
21
Reactive power Q
Reactive power measurement
22
Apparent power S
Apparent power measurement
23
Power factor Cosj
Power factor measurement
24
Frequency f
Frequency measurement
25
Harmonic distortion
Harmonic distortion measurement
26
Temperature
Temperature measurement
27-32 User-defined measurement
Any analog input (AI) type of user-defined
measurement
33-37 User-defined pulse counter
Any pulse counter (PC) type of user-defined
measurement
38
Active energy (kWh)
Active energy counter for kWh
39
Active energy (MWh)
Active energy counter for MWh
40
Active energy (GWh)
Active energy counter for GWh
41
Reversed active energy (kWh)
Reversed active energy counter for kWh
42
Reversed active energy (MWh)
Reversed active energy counter for MWh
43
Reversed active energy (GWh)
Reversed active energy counter for GWh
44
Reactive energy (kvarh)
Reactive energy counter for kvarh
45
Reactive energy (Mvarh)
Reactive energy counter for Mvarh
46
Reactive energy (Gvarh)
Reactive energy counter for Gvarh
47
Reversed reactive energy (kvarh)
Reversed reactive energy counter for kvarh
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
111
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
5.3.5.
An example of the measurement configuration
The configuration of the measurement with a horizontal field can be given as an
example:
48
Reversed reactive energy (Mvarh)
Reversed reactive energy counter for Mvarh
49
Reversed reactive energy (Gvarh)
Reversed reactive energy counter for Gvarh
110
Current L1
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
111
Current L2
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
112
Current L3
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
113
Neutral current I0
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
114
Directional neutral current Ij
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
115
Maximum demand I15min
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
116
Voltage U12
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
117
Voltage U23
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
118
Voltage U31
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
119
Residual voltage U0
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
120
Active power P
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
121
Reactive power Q
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
122
Apparent power S
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
123
Power factor Cosj
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
124
Frequency f
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
125
Harmonic distortion
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
126
Temperature
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
127-
132
User-defined measurement
(optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
Index Explanation
Purpose
112
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
Table 5.3.5-1
Measurement configuration
Attribute
Value
Picture Function Name
MEAS1
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Outgoing HA2
DEVICE_NAME
CT
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
N/A
P_OBJECT_LN
ESTHA02CT
STATION_TYPE
RED 500 / REX (LON)
TYPE_MEAS_1
Current L1
FOLDER_1_TITLE
IL1
MEAS_1_DECIMALS
0
SHOW_MEAS_1
Yes
SHOW_MEAS_1_AS_BAR
Yes
SHOW_MEAS_1_UNIT
Yes
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_1
REF543
FUNCTION_BLOCK_1
MECU3-B
TYPE_MEAS_2
Active power P
FOLDER_2_TITLE
P
MEAS_2_DECIMALS
1
SHOW_MEAS_2
No
SHOW_MEAS_2_AS_BAR
No
SHOW_MEAS_2_UNIT
Yes
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_2
REF543
FUNCTION_BLOCK_2
MEPE7-B
TYPE_MEAS_3
Reactive power Q
FOLDER_3_TITLE
Q
MEAS_3_DECIMALS
1
SHOW_MEAS_3
No
SHOW_MEAS_3_AS_BAR
No
SHOW_MEAS_3_UNIT
Yes
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_3
REF543
FUNCTION_BLOCK_3
MEPE7-B
TYPE_MEAS_4
None
FOLDER_4_TITLE
N/A
MEAS_4_DECIMALS
N/A
SHOW_MEAS_4
N/A
SHOW_MEAS_4_AS_BAR
N/A
SHOW_MEAS_4_UNIT
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_4
N/A
FUNCTION_BLOCK_4
N/A
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
113
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
5.4.
Application engineering information
5.4.1.
Limit supervision
Normally the alarm limits of the measurement are supervised within MicroSCADA.
There are devices that supervise the alarm limits in case RTU has been build with
EDU (the type of the process objects is RTU2xx with FTABs) and with REF54*
with LON-protocol.
When using SACO 16A3 with SPA/ANSI or REF54* with LON, the alarm limits
are sent to the device when edited with the Edit Limits dialog, if the used relays
SPA-parameters are defined to the process objects comment text (CX attribute) with
the following syntax:
Spa code for high alarm limit (HI) / Spa code for high warning limit (HW) / Spa code
for low warning limit (LW) / Spa code for low alarm limit (LI)/ scaling factor /slave
or station address. For example, alarm limits for channel 1 measurement in SACO
16A3: 1S2///1S3/1/1 (Note! SACO 16A3 has no warning limits.)
5.4.2.
The structure of the measurement
This document describes the structure of the measurement. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
measurement function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST,
LANG0 and USE.
The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_ME1T - symbol without
field, FPI_ME2T - symbol with a horizontal field or FPI_ME3T - symbol with
vertical bars) if it does not already exist. The “type” picture function contains all
common programs for the “instance” picture function and it is only visible in the
Picture Editor.
5.4.3.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all measurement pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The path is /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Yes
EVENT_RECORDING
N/A
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
-
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_MEASM12 (vertical CT)
Attribute
Value
114
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
Table 5.4.3-1
Measurement pictures and a description of their
functionalities
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 5.4.3-2
Measurement pictures and a description of their
functionalities
Picture
Functionality
FPI_ME1T.PIC
Common programs for all measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)
FPI_ME1I_S.PIC
Small picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)
FPI_ME1I_M.PIC
Medium picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)
FPI_ME1I_L.PIC
Large picture function for measurements without a field
(measurement symbol)
FPI_ME2T.PIC
Common programs for all measurements with a horizontal field
FPI_ME2I_S.PIC
Small picture function for measurements with a horizontal field
FPI_ME2I_M.PIC
Medium picture function for measurements with a horizontal field
FPI_ME2I_L.PIC
Large picture function for measurements with a horizontal field
FPI_ME3T.PIC
Common programs for all measurements with a vertical field
FPI_ME3I_S.PIC
Small picture function for measurements with a vertical field
FPI_ME3I_M.PIC
Medium picture function for measurements with a vertical field
FPI_ME3I_L.PIC
Large picture function for measurements with a vertical field
Picture
Functionality
FPU_MEA.PIC
Main dialog
FPU_MEB.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_MED.PIC
Blocking dialog
FPU_MEE.PIC
Edit alarm/warning limits dialog
FPU_MEF.PIC
Zero deadband setting dialog
FPU_MEG.PIC
Active object messages dialog
FPU_MEH.PIC
Additional information dialog for edit alarm/warning limits dialog
FPU_MEI.PIC
Freeze counters dialog, available only with DNP 3.0 and pulse
counter type of object
FPU_FTRENA.PIC
Small fast trend
FPU_FTRENB.PIC
Zoomed fast trend
FPU_FTRENC.PIC
Fast trend settings dialog
FPU_FT_L1.PIC
Combo box list picture for fast trend settings
FPU_FT_L1.PIC
Combo box list picture for fast trend settings
FORM4FPAI2.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
115
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
5.4.4.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the
measurement. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 5.4.4-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
5.4.5.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the measurement help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 5.4.5-1
Measurement help text files
5.4.6.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the measurement. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.
Text file
Functionality
FPI_ME.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FPU_ME.TXT
Text file for all measurement dialogs
FPU_FTREN.TXT
Text file for all fast trend dialogs
FORM4FPAI2.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
Help file
Functionality
FPI_ME1.HLP
Picture function installation help file for measurement without a field
(measurement symbol)
FPI_ME2.HLP
Picture function installation help file for measurement with a
horizontal field
FPI_ME3.HLP
Picture function installation help file for measurement with a vertical
bar
FPU_MEA.HLP
Main dialog help file
FPU_MEB.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
FPU_MED.HLP
Blockings dialog help file
FPU_MEE.HLP
Edit alarm/warning limits dialog help file
FPU_MEF.HLP
Zero deadband settings dialog help file
FPU_MEG.HLP
Active object messages dialog help file
FPU_MEI.HLP
Freeze counters dialog help file
FPU_TRENB.HLP
Zoomed fast trend dialog help file
FPU_TRENC.HLP
Fast trend settings dialog help file
116
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
Table 5.4.6-1
Configuration files used by the measurement
5.4.7.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the measurement function. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 5.4.7-1
Text files used by the measurement function.
5.4.8.
Process objects
The measurement process objects can be created with the process object tool while
configuring the functions. The objects are created using the indexes below. The used
index is dependent on the type of the measurements configured to each picture
function.
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_ME1.DAT
Contains the configuration data for measurement without a field
(measurement symbol) when it is created, modified or deleted by
the configuration tools.
FPI_ME1.POT
Contains the process object definitions for measurement without a
field (measurement symbol).
FPI_ME2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for measurement with a horizontal
field when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration
tools.
FPI_ME2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for measurement with a
horizontal field.
FPI_ME3.DAT
Contains the configuration data for measurement with a vertical bar
when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.
FPI_ME3.POT
Contains the process object definitions for measurement with a
vertical bar.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.
FPI_FB.TXT
Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main dialog for the measurements.
FPU_FT_SET.TXT
Default settings for all fast trends
FPU_FTNEW.TXT
Used when opening a new fast trend
FPU_FTOPEN.TXT
Checking for which fast trends that should be opened when a
picture is opened
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
117
5. Measurements
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
5
Table 5.4.8-1
Process objects
Index
Obj.
type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
AI
Current L1
FPPMEAMCUR
11
AI
Current L2
FPPMEAMCUR
12
AI
Current L3
FPPMEAMCUR
13
AI
Neutral current I0
FPPMEAMNCU
14
AI
Directional neutral current Ij
FPPMEAMDNC
15
AI
Maximum demand I15min
FPPMEAMMDC
16
AI
Voltage U12
FPPMEAMVOL
17
AI
Voltage U23
FPPMEAMVOL
18
AI
Voltage U31
FPPMEAMVOL
19
AI
Residual voltage U0
FPPMEAMRVL
20
AI
Active power P
FPPMEAMAPW
21
AI
Reactive power Q
FPPMEAMRPW
22
AI
Apparent power S
FPPMEAMAPP
23
AI
Power factor Cosj
FPPMEAMCOS
24
AI
Frequency f
FPPMEAMFRQ
25
AI
Harmonic distortion
FPPMEAMHDS
26
AI
Temperature
FPPMEAMTMP
27-32
AI
User defined measurement
FPPMEAMXXX
33-37
PC
User defined pulse counter
FPPMEAMXXX
38
PC
Active energy E (kWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
39
PC
Active energy E (MWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
40
PC
Active energy E (GWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
41
PC
Reverse active energy E (kWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
42
PC
Reverse active energy E (MWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
43
PC
Reverse active energy E (GWh)
FPPMEAMAEN
44
PC
Reactive energy E (kvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
45
PC
Reactive energy E (Mvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
46
PC
Reactive energy E (Gvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
47
PC
Reverse reactive energy E (kvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
48
PC
Reverse reactive energy E
(Mvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
49
PC
Reverse reactive energy E
(Gvarh)
FPPMEAMREN
110
EVREC
Current L1
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAECUR
111
EVREC
Current L2
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAECUR
112
EVREC
Current L3
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAECUR
118
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
5.
Measurements
Configuration Guide
5.4.9.
Scale objects
At the first installation, the measurement creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000
scale) will also be created at the installation.
5.4.10.
Command procedures
At the first installation, the measurement creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.
113
EVREC
Neutral current I0
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAENCU
114
EVREC
Directional neutral current Ij
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEDNC
115
EVREC
Maximum demand I15min
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEMDC
116
EVREC
Voltage U12
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEVOL
117
EVREC
Voltage U23
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEVOL
118
EVREC
Voltage U31
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEVOL
119
EVREC
Residual voltage U0
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAERVL
120
EVREC
Active power P
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEAPW
121
EVREC
Reactive power Q
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAERPW
122
EVREC
Apparent power S
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEAPP
123
EVREC
Power factor Cosj
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAECOS
124
EVREC
Frequency f
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEFRQ
125
EVREC
Harmonic distortion
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEHDS
126
EVREC
Temperature
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAETMP
127-132 EVREC
User defined measurement
Only RP570;
optional
FPPMEAEXXX
Index
Obj.
type
Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
119
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
6. Transformer
6.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• SPACOM/LON (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
6.2.
Picture function installation and configuration
This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process
transformer (with SPAU 341 and with SPOC 1xx/RTU-200) and transformer
measurement. The picture functions are found in the directory /LIB4/ FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST and they should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB 510/MV Process 2.x/Transformer). Configuration of the
picture function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool,
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
6.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the transformer to have full functionality, the following components
need to be installed:
• Base
• Station
• Bay
Transformer measurement needs transformer “host” picture function to be installed.
6.2.2.
Installation
There are four different sizes of the transformer picture functions: very small (2*2),
small (3*3), medium (4*4) and large (5*5). The corresponding sizes for the
transformer picture function are 32x 40 pixels (2 x2 semigraphical block), 48 x 60
pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks), 64 x 80 pixels (4 x 4 semigraphical blocks) and
80 x 100 pixels (5 x 5 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this
area.
The size of the measurement depends on how many indications are selected to be
shown. Thus, the size can be 5*1, 5*2, 5*3 and 5*4.
It is not recommended that different sizes of picture functions are used within the
same bay because of the different snap of the feeder lines.
1MRS751887-MEN
120
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
Table 6.2.2-1
During the installation the following information has to be
given
6.3.
Picture function configuration
6.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage of the object
identification (OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process
object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local language has
to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General chapter in this
MV Process Configuration Manual.
6.3.2.
Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool
Table 6.3.2-1
The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Standard Configuration Tool (SPAU 341)
Attribute
Meaning
Default
ID
Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
NOMINAL_VOLTAGE
Nominal voltage of transformer
10
MIN_POSIT
Minimum position of tap changer
1
MAX_POSIT
Minimum position of tap changer
19
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol
SPACOM/SRIO
(ANSI)
CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDO
W
The name of the window in which the
transformer control dialog is opened.
MNOPER
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization group
MV_CONTROL
TRANSFORMER_TYPE
The number of windings
2-winding
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without a
button
With button
HARDWIRED
Connection_type between SPAU
modules in parallel operation
Not hardwired
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_SPL
IT
Determines if secondary and tertiary
windings should propagate color to the
line segments connected to them, or the
color of the line segment connected to
primary winding should propagate
through the transformer.
NONE
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
121
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
Table 6.3.2-2
The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Standard Configuration Tool (SPOC 1xx/RTU-200)
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NR The color of the primary winding
36
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NR The color of the secondary winding
36
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NR The color of the tertiary winding
36
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
MIN_POSITION
Minimum position of tap changer
1
MAX_POSITION
Minimum position of tap changer
19
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
obj.
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol
SPACOM/
SRIO(ANSI)
CMD_PARAMETER
A selector for selecting of control
method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0
protocol is selected, otherwise this
attribute is being disabled.
N/A
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status with
DNP 3.0 protocol.
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
The data acquisition unit towards pro-
cess
None
CONTROL_DIALOG_WIND
OW
The name of the window to which the
control dialog is opened.
MNOPER
AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE The type of the auto/manual signal
01=manual, 10=auto
(DB)
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization group
MV_CONTROL
TRANSFORMER_TYPE
The number of windings
2-winding
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without
button
With button
EVENT_RECORDING
Selection whether event recording
objects are created when RP570 pro-
tocol is used or not
N/A
122
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_S
PLIT
Determines if secondary and tertiary
windings should propagate color to
the line segments connected to them,
or the color of the line segment con-
nected to primary winding should
propagate through the transformer.
NONE
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_
NUMBER
The color of the primary winding
36
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_
NR
The color of the secondary winding
36
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_
NUMBER
The color of the tertiary winding
36
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
transformer objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
transformer objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
123
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the transformer. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the transformer on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the transformer. By default, this identifier
is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object linked
to the selected transformer. Therefore, the configurable
attribute within a picture function has meaning only when the
process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
transformer on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc.
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
The nominal voltage of the voltage regulator.
MIN_POSIT/(ION)
The minimum position of the tap changer.
MAX_POSIT/(ION)
The maximum position of the tap changer.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the
complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
thesource of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
124
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program
U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to introduce other
required process objects.
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols for SPAU
341 is as follows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx(LON)
and for SPOC 11x or RTU-200
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RED 500 / REx(LON)
- RTU2xx (RP570)
- RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
- IEC 60870-5-101
- IEC 60870-5-103
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
CMD_PARAMETER
A selector type of a combo box to select the command
parameter for control method. This attribute has meaning
only if IEC 60870-5-101 or DNP 3.0 protocol is selected,
otherwise this attribute is being disabled.
The supported control parameters are:
- Double command (TY = 46)
- Single command (TY = 45)
for IEC 60870-5-101 protocol and
- Select-Operate
for DNP 3.0 protocol.
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
125
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the transformer. The configurable attribute
is being enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than
one data acquisition unit of the same type within the bay, the
additional characters can be left out.
This attribute is automatically given when SPAU 341 is used
as the regulator.
CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDO
W
The name of the window in which the transformer control
dialog is opened. This feature can be utilized e.g. when
parallel operation is used and more than one control dialog is
wanted to be open for the transformer at the same time.
AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE The type and polarity of the auto / manual indication object
for SPOC 1xx and RTU 200.
126
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of
the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as
a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents
of the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.
The name may not be composed of two letters followed
by a number.
The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization level
of each user in this group can be defined afterwards by the
system manager with User Management pictures.
TRANSFORMER_TYPE
Selection for 2-winding or 3-winding transformer.
HARD_WIRED
The connection type between different SPAU modules when
parallel operation is used. Hardwired means that different
SPAU-modules have a physical wiring between them. This is
used when master/slave operation mode is wanted.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the transformer. By
default the symbol is provided with active button.
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is
a need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and
the value has no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate time
stamp is needed or available, or the device is emulating the
RP 570 without an event recording possibility, do not set this
attribute ON.
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_S
PLIT
The windings can use the same colors, (NONE), or each
winding has its own color (SPLIT).
TOPO_OBJECT_COLORx_MR is used to set the colors of
the windings when selection is split.
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_
NR
Color applied to the primary winding by busbar coloring
when either the secondary or the tertiary winding becomes
active and the source of power is located on the secondary
or tertiary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the primary
winding.
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_
NR
Color applied to the secondary winding by busbar coloring
when either the primary or the tertiary winding becomes
active and the source of power is located on the primary or
tertiary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the secondary
winding.
TOPO_OBJECT_
COLOR3_NR
Color applied to the tertiary winding by busbar coloring when
either the primary or the secondary winding becomes active
and the source of power is located on the primary or
secondary side of the transformer. This color is further
propagated to the adjacent line segment of the tertiary
winding.
!
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
127
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
6.3.3.
Configuration of the transformer measurement
The measurement for the transformer is linked to the transformer picture function.
Table 6.3.3-1
For the transformer measurement there are the following
attributes to configure with the Standard Configuration Tool
The measurement can be placed freely into the picture. It is possible to link several
measurements to the same transformer picture function. The number of attributes to
be shown is freely configurable, too.
)LJ
([DPSOHVRIGLIIHUHQWFRQILJXUDWLRQRIWUDQVIRUPHUPHDVXUHPHQW
Attribute
Meaning
Default
CONNECT_TO_OBJECT
The name of the transformer
picture function to which the
measurement is linked.
-
VOLTAGE_INDICATION
Selection for voltage indication.
Yes
AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION
Selection for auto/manual
indication.
Yes
TAP_POSITION_INDICATION
Selection for tap position
indication.
Yes
PARALLEL_INDICATION
Selection for single/parallel
indication.
No
128
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
6.3.4.
Configuration with the Representation Tool
Table 6.3.4-1
The transformer has the following attributes to configure with
the Representation Tool
Table 6.3.4-2
The transformer requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions
By default, there are two sets (horizontal and vertical) of symbols in four different
sizes for the transformer.
6.3.5.
Configuration with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the transformer, the Process Object Tool will
create a certain set of process objects into the database. Those process objects which
are going be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number,
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set shown
in picture
F_REPR/F_TRANS3
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the
transformer. The predefined representation can be selected
from the selector type of list called Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and
use a representation set of your own. In that case one of the
existing representation sets may be copied into a representation
file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the application, and
each representation may be modified as needed. If object
specific representations are needed, the representation set
(under the application) may be renamed, and the name of the
representation may be written into the selector with the logical
path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Transformer picture function provides a possibility to make one
own set of representations. This is done by selecting the empty
representation set and then drawing the wanted figure in
program U_DRAW_FIGURE.
Wanted features can be also added to existing representations
in U_DRAW_FIGURE program.
Selector
Condition
Default color
1
selected on command
white
2
Update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device
not synchonized or overflow
magenta
3
Unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Acknowledged alarm
red
5
Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
6
Manually entered or substituted
cyan
7
Control blocked
brown
8
Normal state
green
9
Substituted
Dark blue
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
129
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.
When process objects are created, default scales are assigned to the analog input
signals meant to be connected to the process (indexes 24,25 and 26). The naming
convention of the scale when SPAU 341 is used as a voltage regulator is FPU_’x’ for
SPA,LON and RP570 protocols and FPU_S’x’ for ANSI protocol. ’x’ stands for the
nominal voltage given in the Standard Configuration Tool. For SPOC 11x the scale
is named as FPU_TCANSI for ANSI protocol, and FPU_TCSPAN for other
available protocols. For RTU-200 the name of the scale is FPU_TCRTU.
Table 6.3.5-1
The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list (SPAU 341)
Index
Explanation
Purposes
10
Tap position indication
Used for indication of the tap changer
position
11
Tap ch. auto / manual ind.
Used for indication of the transformer auto
manual state
12
Tap ch. single / parallel ind.
Used for indication of the transformer single /
parallel state
13
Tap ch. master / slave ind.
Used for sending "close select" -command of
the disconnector section to the control unit.
14
Tap ch. manual cmd
Used for sending "manual" -command to the
control unit.
15
Tap ch. auto cmd
Used for sending "auto" -command to the
control unit
16
Tap ch. raise cmd
Used for sending "raise" -command to the
control unit.
17
Tap ch. lower cmd
Used for sending "lower" -command to the
control unit.
18
Tap ch. single / parallel cmd
Used for sending "single" or “parallel”
command to the control unit.
19
Tap ch. master/slave command
Used for sending "master"- or “slave” -
command to the control unit.
20
Transformer ext. blocking
Used for indication of the transformer
blocking signal
21
Undervoltage blocking
Used for indication of the transformer
undervoltage blocking signal.
22
Overcurrent blocking
Used for indication of the transformer
overcurrent blocking signal
23
Main/second settings ind.
Used for indication of the active settings
24
Voltage
Used for indication of the voltage
25
Ref. voltage ind.
Used for indication of the reference voltage
26
Ref. voltage setpoint
Used for sending the reference voltage to
control unit. (Main settings
27
Ref. voltage setpoint
Used for sending the reference voltage to
control unit. (Second settings)
130
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
Indexes 19, 21..23 and 25..28 are not created if controlling is done via SPOC 1xx.
Indexes 15, 17, 19, 21..23 and 25..28 are not created if controlling is done via RTU-
200.
6.3.6.
An example of the transformer configuration
Table 6.3.6-1
The configuration of the transformer (SPAU 341).
28
Checksum of SGF1
Used for indication of value of switchgroup
SGF1.
29
Tap changer operation counter
In internal use, Used for counting the number
of tap changer step changes.
30
Selected on monitor
In internal use, tags the selection of the
object made in different pictures or monitors
249
Transformer routing prim. info
For busbar coloring purposes
250
Transformer predefined color
For busbar coloring purposes
253
Transformer fict. pos. ind.
For busbar coloring purposes
255
Transformer predefined color
For busbar coloring purposes
Index
Explanation
Purposes
Attributes
Value
ID
T1
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Transformer 1
DEVICE_NAME
TR1
NOMINAL_VOLTAGE
20
MIN_POSIT
1
MAX_POSIT
19
P_OBJECT_LN
ESTH03_T1
STATION_TYPE
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDOW
MNOPER
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
TRANSFORMER_TYPE
2-winding
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Yes
HARDWIRED
No
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_SPLIT
SPLIT
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NR
9
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NR
10
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NR
- (Not in use, two winding transformer)
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_TRANS3
(vertical link (3*3))
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
131
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
6.4.
Application engineering information
This chapter describes the structure of the transformer. All pictures, form pictures,
help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. Transformer
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.
6.4.1.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all transformer pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document.
The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 6.4.1-1
Transformer pictures
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 6.4.1-2
Transformer pictures
Picture
Functionality
FPI_TRM1.PIC
Measurement for transformer (SPAU 341)
FPI_TRM2.PIC
Measurement for transformer (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)
FPI_TRT_1
Type picture function (SPAU 341)
FPI_TRI_1V
Very small picture function (2*2) for transformer
FPI_TRI_1S
Small picture function (3*3) for transformer
FPI_TRI_1M
Medium picture function (4*4) for transformer
FPI_TRI_1L
Large picture function (5*5) for transformer
FPI_TRT_2
Type picture function (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)
FPI_TRI_2V
Very small picture function (2*2) for transformer
FPI_TRI_2S
Small picture function (3*3) for transformer
FPI_TRI_2M
Medium picture function (4*4) for transformer
FPI_TRI_2L
Large picture function (5*5) for transformer
Picture
Functionality
FPU_TRA.PIC
Main control dialog (SPAU 341)
FPU_TRB.PIC
Main control dialog (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)
FPU_TRC.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_TRD.PIC
Operation counters dialog
FPU_TRE.PIC
Blockings dialog
FPU_TRF.PIC
Object messages dialog
FPU_TRG.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_TRH.PIC
Information dialog
FPU_TRI.PIC
Relay tool dialog
FPU_TRJ.PIC
Drop-down list box
FPU_TRK.PIC
Drop-down list box
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single/parallel indication
132
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
6.4.2.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the
transformer: The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 6.4.2-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files used by the
transformer
6.4.3.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the transformer help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 6.4.3-1
The transformer help text files
FORM4FPAI2.PIC
Format picture for printing warning/alarm of voltage or op. counter
FORM4FPAI3.PIC
Format picture for printing tap position
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single indications
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing object commands
FORM4FPDB1.PIC
Format picture for printing auto/manual state
Picture
Functionality
Text file
Functionality
FPI_TR1.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function (SPAU
341)
FPI_TR2R.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function (RTU-200)
FPI_TR2S.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function (SPOC 11x
)
FPI_TR1.TXT
Text file for all transformer dialogs (SPAU 341)
FPI_TR2.TXT
Text file for all transformer dialogs (SPOC 1xx / RTU-200)
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for printing OV related texts for analog indications
FORM4FPAI2.TXT
Text file for printing AZ related texts for analog indications
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for printing single indications
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for printing object commands
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for printing double indications
Help file
Functionality
FPI_TR1.HLP
Picture function installation help file (SPAU 341)
FPI_TR2.HLP
Picture function installation help file (SPOC 1xx / RTU-200)
FPI_TRM.HLP
Picture function installation help file, transformer measurement
FPU_TRA.HLP
Main control dialog help file (SPAU 341)
FPU_TRB.HLP
Main control dialog help file (SPOC 11x / RTU-200)
FPU_TRD.HLP
Operation counters help file
FPU_TRE.HLP
Blockings dialog help file
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
133
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
6.4.4.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the transformer. The path is LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 6.4.4-1
Configuration files used by the transformer
6.4.5.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the transformer. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 6.4.5-1
Text files used by the transformer
6.4.6.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created depending on the type of the
transformer. The SPA-parameter where the process object is linked is listed for
SPAU 341.
FPU_TRF.HLP
Object messages dialog help file
FPU_TRG.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
FPU_TRI.HLP
Relay tool dialog help file
Help file
Functionality
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_TR_1.DAT
Contains the configuration data for the transformer when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools (SPAU
341).
FPI_TR_2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for transformer when it is created,
modified or deleted by the configuration tools (SPOC 11x / RTU-
200).
FPI_TRM12.DAT
Contains the configuration data for transformer measurements.
FPI_TR_1.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
FPI_TR_2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation
tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for transformer.
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they
are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
134
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
6.
Transformer
Configuration Guide
Table 6.4.6-1
Process objects that will be created depending on the type of
the transformer
Index
Object
type
Meaning of Process
object
Remarks
Group Identifier
Spa
par.
10
AI
Tap changer position
FPTAVRIPOS
V3
11
BI/DB
Tap changer manual/
auto -ind.
FPTAVRIMAN
O6
12
BI/AI
Tap changer single/
parallel -ind.
FPTAVRISGL
V3
13
BI
Tap changer master/
slave -ind.
FPTAVRIMST
14
BO
Tap changer manual
state cmd
FPTAVRCMAN
I7
15
BO
Tap changer auto state
cmd
FPTAVRCMAN
I6
16
BO
Tap changer raise cmd
FPTAVRCPOS
I9
17
BO
Tap changer lower cmd
FPTAVRCPOS
I10
18
BO
Tap changer single/
parallel cmd
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRCSGL
V152
19
BO
Tap changer master/
slave cmd
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRCMST
20
BI
Tap changer external
blocking
FPTAVRIBLK
I12
21
BI
Tap changer
undervoltage blocking
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRIBLK
O4
22
BI
Tap changer overcurrent
blocking
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRIBLK
O3
23
BI
Tap changer main/
second setting
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRISBK
V150
24
AI
Voltage
FPTAVRMVOL
I1
25
AI
Tap changer reference
voltage
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRMRVO
S1
26
AO
Tap changer ref. voltage
setpoint
(main)
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRSRVO
S21
27
AO
Tap changer ref. voltage
setpoint
(second)
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRSRVO
S41
28
AI
Checksum SGF1
Only SPAU
341C
FPTAVRICHK
S10
29
AI
Tap changer operation
counter
FPTAVRICNR
30
AI
Tap changer selected
on monitor
FPTAVRXMEV
111
EVREC/
AI
Tap changer manual/
auto -ind.
Only RP570
and ANSI
FPTAVREMAN
249
BI
Transformer routing
prim. info
BB coloring
FPTAVRXPOS
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
135
6. Transformer
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
6
6.4.7.
Scale objects
At the first installation, the transformer creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000
scale) will also be created at the installation.
The scale for the voltage object for SPAU 341 (index 24) is created as follows:
FPU_’nominal_voltage’ for SPA,LON and FPU_S’nominal_voltage’ for ANSI,
where ‘nominal_voltage’ is given during the picture function installation. The
corresponding scales for SPOC are FPU_TCSPAN (SPA) and FPU_TCANSI
(ANSI).
6.4.8.
Command procedures
At the first installation, the transformer creates the command procedure
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created while installing. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates the
position indication double binary from the analog input. The command procedure
FPU_TCCO is created for updating the operation counter object.
6.4.9.
Event channels
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.
The event channel FPU_TCCO is set to activate the command procedure
FPU_AI2DB .
250
AI
Transformer predefined
color
BB coloring
FPTAVRXPCD
253
BI
Transformer fict. pos.
ind.
BB coloring
FPTAVRXPOS
255
AI
Transformer predefined
color
BB coloring
FPTAVRXPCD
Index
Object
type
Meaning of Process
object
Remarks
Group Identifier
Spa
par.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
137
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
7.
Protection tripping tag
7.1.
Communication support
The trip tag with a database of its own supports the following protocols:
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/REX (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
7.2.
Environmental requirements
In order for the the trip tag to have full functionality, the Base function needs to be
installed first.
To be able to reset latched protection unit remotely, it is necessary to install the
standard function for switching device (circuit breaker) to gain access to the latch
reset dialog of the switching device.
If the trip signal from SPACOM family is being used, it is recommended to first
create an event database with the SPACOM Relay Configuration Tool and then link
these process objects into the trip tag.
7.3.
Configuration of the tripping tag
7.3.1.
Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool
Table 7.3.1-1
Configurable Attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’ Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database
process objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device &
protocol
RED 500/REX
(LON)
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status
with DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
The data acquisition unit towards
process
None
FUNCTION_BLOCK
Function block of data acquisition
unit
-
1MRS751887-MEN
138
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event
recording with RP 570
No process objects
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x
The logical name of the database
process objects to which this trip
tag is linked.
-
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_
x
The module to which this trip tag
is linked.
No linking
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the tripping
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects
within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
tripping objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same bay (feeder).
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the protection unit. By default the
maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the tripping objects
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
139
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’num
ber’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the protection tripping. By default, this
identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT.
The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected protection tripping tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has meaning
only when the process objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
tripping objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore
(_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the
complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the
following naming convention:
140
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects (not
needed with protection tripping tag).
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects. The configurable attribute is being enabled if the
attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as
follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via
LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/REx
(LON).
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there
is need for output status process objects with the DNP 3.0
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP 3.0, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
141
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the protection. The configurable attribute
is being enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module which
connects the signals from the process to the communication
system, can be defined either by selecting the unit from the
selection list and editing it or just by entering the type
designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by
using additional characters. As an example, the data
acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC 535 C3
and SACO 64D4 are:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit distinction
character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more
than one data acquisition unit of the same type within the
bay, the additional characters can be left out.
FUNCTION_BLOCK
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of the data acquisition unit
that handles the signals for this picture function. If the
configurable attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT does not
specify such a device that contains function blocks or
P_OBJECT_LN has not been configured, this attribute is
being disabled, and the value has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
Devices like REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new
one), you can enter it yourself!
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there
is need for event recording process objects with the RP 570
protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU
2xx/FTABs or P_OBJECT_LN has not been configured, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has
no meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from the process device
comes into the event recording process object. If no
accurate time stamp is needed or available, or the device is
emulating the RP 570 without an event recording possibility,
do not set this attribute ON.
142
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x
The logical name of the database process objects of the
protection module x (x=1..5). The maximum length of the
text is 10 characters. Allowed characters are the letters A-Z,
all digits and the underscore (_).
The configurable attributes LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x and
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x is utilized to create a link
between existing protection tripping indication objects from
the other picture function (e.g. protection module) and the
trip indication tag. It even supports linking of user-defined
process objects as LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x is an
editable selector.
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODU
LE_x
An editable selector type of a combo box to select the type
designation of the protection module x (x=1..5). The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x has been configured.
By default, all protection modules from the SPACOM family
have been implemented for the users to choose from. The
supported modules are:
SPAM 05x
SPCD 2D55
SPCD 3C21
SPCD 3C22
SPCD 3C23
SPCD 3D53
SPCJ 1C7
SPCJ 1C8
SPCJ 2C30
SPCJ 3C3
SPCJ 3C48
SPCJ 3D35
SPCJ 4D24
SPCJ 4D28
SPCJ 4D29
SPCJ 4D34
SPCJ 4D36
SPCJ 4D40
SPCJ 4D44
SPCJ 4D61
SPCP 3C2
SPCS 2D26
SPCS 2D32
SPCS 2D37
SPCS 3C4
SPCS 4D11
SPCS 4D12
SPCS 4D13
SPCU 1C1
SPCU 1C6
SPCU 1D39
SPCU 1D47
SPCU 3C14
SPCU 3C15
SPEF 3A2
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
143
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
The minimum requirement for the tripping tag to function is
the following indeces have been created and SPACOM
events have been enabled by using the Relay Configuration
Tool:
SPAM 05x
index 122 thermal trip (E5/E6)
index 125 dI> trip (E11/E12)
index 126 Is> trip (E13/E14)
index 128 I0> trip (E17/E18)
index 129 I> trip (E19/E20)
SPCD 2D55
index 26 TS2 (E31/E32) note!
index 12 dI01> (E3/E4)
index 15 dI02> (E9/E10)
SPCD 3C21
index 32 dI> L1 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3C22
index 34 dI> L2 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3C23
index 36 dI> L3 (E3/E4)
SPCD 3D53
index 44 TS2 (E27/E28) note!
index 31 3dI> trip (E1/E2)
index 32 3dI>> trip (E3/E4)
index 49 3dI> trip/L1 (1E1/1E2)
index 50 3dI>> trip/L1 (1E3/1E4)
index 53 3dI> trip/L2 (2E1/2E2)
index 54 3dI>> trip/L2 (2E3/2E4)
index 57 3dI> trip/L3 (3E1/3E2)
index 58 3dI>> trip/L3 (3E3/3E4)
SPCJ 1C7
index 12 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 14 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 1C8
index 16 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 18 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 2C30
index 23 dI0> trip (E1/E2)
index 25 I0> trip (E5/E6)
SPCJ 3C3
index 20 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 22 I>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCJ 3C48
index 57 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 59 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 61 I0> trip (E11/E12)
SPCJ 3D35
index 51 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 41 I1> trip (E3/E4)
index 43 I2> trip (E7/E8)
index 45 I3> trip (E11/E12)
index 47 I4> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D24
index 44 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 33 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 35 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 37 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 39 I0>> trip (E15/E16)
144
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
SPCJ 4D28
index 80 TS2 (E25/E26) note!
index 66 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 68 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 70 I>>> trip (E11/E12)
index 72 I0> trip (E15/E16)
index 74 I0>> trip (E19/E20)
index 76 dI> trip (E23/E24)
SPCJ 4D29
index 57 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 46 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 48 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 50 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 52 I0>> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D34
index 78 TS2 (E41/E42)
index 60 thermal alarm trip (E5/E6)
index 61 thermal overload trip (E7/E8)
index 63 Is> trip (E11/E12)
index 65 I>> trip (E15/E16)
index 67 I0> trip (E19/E20)
index 69 dI> trip (E23/E24)
index 71 I< trip (E27/E28)
SPCJ 4D36
index 39 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 28 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 30 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 32 I0> trip (E11/E12)
index 34 I0>> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D40
index 95 TS2 (E33/E34)
index 80 Ib> trip (E3/E4)
index 82 Ia> trip (E7/E8)
index 84 I< trip (E11/E12)
index 86 dI1> trip (E15/E16)
index 88 dI2> trip (E19/E20)
SPCJ 4D44
index 108 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 97 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 99 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 101 I01> trip (E11/E12)
index 103 I02> trip (E15/E16)
SPCJ 4D61
index 135 TS2 (E31/E32) note!
index 121 I> trip (E3/E4)
index 123 I>> trip (E7/E8)
index 125 I>>> trip (E11/E12)
index 127 I0> trip (E15/E16)
index 129 I0>> trip (E19/E20)
index 131 dI> trip (E23/E24)
SPCP 3C2
index 62 U>, U>> trip (E3/E4)
index 64 reverse power trip (E7/E8)
SPCS 2D26
index 95 TS2 (E19/E20) note!
index 87 U0b> trip (E3/E4)
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
145
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
SPCS 2D32
index 107 TS2 (E22/E30) note!
index 97 I0> trip (E5/E6)
index 99 U02> trip (E9/E10)
index 101 I0>> trip (E13/E14)
index 103 Itr> trip (E17/E18)
SPCS 2D37
index 22 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 12 I01> first trip (E3/E4)
index 14 I01> second trip (E7/E8)
index 16 I02> trip (E11/E12)
index 18 I03> trip (E15/E16)
SPCS 3C4
index 29 I0> trip (E3/E4)
index 31 I0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCS 4D11
index 121 TS2 (E25/
E26)
index 111 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 113 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 115 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCS 4D12
index 134 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 124 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 126 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 128 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCS 4D13
index 147 TS2 (E25/E26)
index 137 I> trip (E5/E6)
index 139 I>> trip (E9/E10)
index 141 I>>> trip (E13/E14)
SPCU 1C1
index 12 U> trip (E3/E4)
index 14 U< trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 1C6
index 16 U0> trip (E3/E4)
index 18 U0>> trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 1D39
index 126 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 120 U0> trip (E11/E12)
SPCU 1D47
index 142 TS2 (E23/E24) note!
index 136 U> trip (E11/E12)
SPCU 3C14
index 20 U> trip (E3/E4)
index 22 U< trip (E7/E8)
SPCU 3C15
index 20 U< trip (E3/E4)
index 22 3U<< trip (E7/E8)
SPEF 3A2
index 101 I> alarm (E3/E4)
index 103 I0> alarm (E7/E8)
index 105 dI> alarm (E11/E12)
146
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
7.3.2.
Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool
Please note that the Representation Tool has only effect for general objects i.e. for
the database created by the trip tag itself. The linked event objects have already pre-
defined representations that cannot be changed by this tool but by other means.
• TRIP_REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the general trip indication.
The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of list called
Library Representations.
By default, more than 50 different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for
the users to choose from; see Fig. 7.3.2.-6 for graphical presentation of symbol sets.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, the user has the possibility to make use of a
representation of his own. In that case the representation should be of the following
selector type:
Table 7.3.2-1
Selector types
Note! As a presumption these modules are using TS2 as the
indicator of latched output.
If there is no appropriate protection module to pick or if
freely defined process objects are going to be used, it is
possible to link those objects by using the following syntax:
"ID","I1","R1","I2","R2","I3","R3", ...
ID = module ID - (used only as a comment)
I1 = DB index of latch indication object
R1 = representation (symbol set) for latch ind.
I2 = DB index of trip indication object 1
R2 = representation (symbol set) for object 1
I3 = DB index of trip indication object 2
R3 = representation (symbol set) for object 2
If the module does not support sending of an event of a
latched output relay, the vector element I1 has been left as
an empty element i.e. "".
As an example, non-directional overcurrent and neutral
earth-fault of REF 54x feeder terminal:
"REF54x","","F_REPR/F_LATCH1","1","F_REPR/
F_TRIP3",- ”60","F_REPR/F_TRIP11"
The type designation of the protection module x (x=1..5) is
not necessary if there is no logical name for the protection
module in question.
Value
Meaning
-1
Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)
0
Trip off
1
Trip on or alarm is prevailing
2
Alarm has not been acknowledged
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
147
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:
F_REPR/TRIP_OWN
The predefined trip symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.
)LJ
3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQZLQGRZ
)LJ
3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ
148
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
)LJ
3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ
)LJ
3UHGHILQHGV\PEROVLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVZLQGRZ
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
149
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
)LJ
7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHSURWHFWLRQWULS
• LATCH_REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the general trip relay latched
indication. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of
list called Library Representations.
By default there is only one symbol set for the users to choose from.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, the user has the possibility to make use of a
representation of his own. In that case the representation should be of the following
selector type:
Table 7.3.2-2
Selector types
The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:
F_REPR/LATCH_OWN
The predefined latch symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.
Value
Meaning
-1
Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)
0
Latch off
1
Latch on
150
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
)LJ
7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHSURWHFWLRQODWFK
7.3.3.
Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the trip tag, the Process Object Tool will create
a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which are
going be linked to actual process should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switching state. All other attributes should have suitable values
for normal operation by default.
Table 7.3.3-1
The Process Object Tool will automatically create objects for
the following purposes
Index
Explanation Purpose
10
General protection trip
indication (optional)
The general protection trip indication can be used as
ON/OFF-type indication of any protection trip within
the bay.
11
General trip relay latched
indication (optional)
The general trip relay latched indication can be used
as ON/OFF-type indication of any latched protection
trip relay within the bay.
12-
17
General trip relay reset
command (optional)
The general trip relay reset command object is an
output object which can be used to reset latched
output relays, trip indicators and memorised
parameters.
110
General protection trip
indication (optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
111
General trip relay latched
indication (optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time stamp) with
RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of stations.
112-
117
Indication for command
termination (optional)
With IEC 870-5-101 and -103 indicates whether the
issued command was successful or not.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
151
7. Protection tripping tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
7
7.4.
Application engineering information
7.4.1.
Pictures
The following picture is found for the trip tag under the path /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST
Table 7.4.1-1
Pictures for the trip tag
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 7.4.1-2
Pictures for the trip tag
7.4.2.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the trip tag.
The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 7.4.2-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files used by the trip tag
7.4.3.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the trip tag help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 7.4.3-1
Trip tag help text files
Picture
Functionality
FPI_TRIP2.PIC
Picture function for trip tag
Picture Functionality
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in MV
Process
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process
Text file
Functionality
FPI_TRIP2.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type of
signals
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals
Help file
Functionality
FPI_TRIP2.HLP
Help file for trip tag installation and configuration
152
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
7.
Protection tripping tag
Configuration Guide
7.4.4.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the trip tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST
Table 7.4.4-1
Configuration files used by the trip tag.
7.4.5.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE
Table 7.4.5-1
Text files used by the auto-reclosing tag.
7.4.6.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created for the trip tag.
Table 7.4.6-1
Process objects that will be created for the trip tag.
7.4.7.
Scale objects
At the first installation the auto-reclosing tag creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale).
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_TRIP2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for the trip tag when it is created,
modified or deleted by the configuration tools.
FPI_TRIP2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.
FPI_FB.TXT
Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.).
Text file
Functionality
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group ident.
10
BI
Protection trip
Optional
FPFTRPITRP
11
BI
Trip relay latched
Optional
FPFTRPITRL
12-
17
BO
Latched trip relay reset
Optional
FPFTRPCTRL
110
EVREC
Protection trip
Only RP570
Optional
FPFTRPETRP
111
EVREC
Trip relay latched
Only RP570
Optional
FPFTRPETRL
112-
117
TERM
Command termination of
latched trip relay reset
Only IEC 870-5-
101 and -103;
Optional
FPFTRPTTRL
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
153
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
8.1.
Communication support
The auto-reclosing tag with a database of its own supports the following protocols:
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• SPACOM/LON (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• MODBUS RTU
8.2.
Environmental requirements
In order for the auto-reclosing tag to have full functionality, the base picture function
has to be installed.
To be able to enable/disable auto-reclosing function or to interrupt auto-reclosing
sequence remotely, it is necessary to install the standard function for the switching
device (circuit breaker) to gain access to the auto-reclosing dialog of the switching
device.
If the auto-reclosing signal from the SPACOM family is being used, it is
recommended to create an event database first with the SPACOM Relay
Configuration Tool and then link these process objects into the auto-reclosing tag.
8.3.
Configuration of the auto-reclosing tag
8.3.1.
Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool
The attributes are listed and explained in the following table.
Table 8.3.1-1
Configurable Attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ Name of the special identifier ‘nr’ Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database
process objects
-
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device &
protocol
RED 500/REX
(LON)
OUTPUT_STATUS
Process objects for output status
with DNP 3.0 protocol
N/A
1MRS751887-MEN
154
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
The data acquisition unit towards
process
None
FUNCTION_BLOCK
Function block of data
acquisition unit
-
AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES
Select object type to indicate
auto-reclosure in progress.
No
SHOW_AR_IN_USE
Show tag during auto-reclosure
Show tag
SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE
Show tag also when no auto-
reclosing is in progress
Do not show tag
EVENT_RECORDING
Process objects for event
recording with RP 570
No process objects
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN
Create link between existing
auto-reclosing objects from other
LIB 5xx functions.
-
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE
Select type designation of the
auto-reclosing module.
No linking
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten last entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
auto-reclosing objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
auto-reclosing objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
155
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the auto-reclosing function.
By default, the maximum length of the text is 5
characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest
entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the auto-
reclosing on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number’ A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter a special identifier of the auto-reclosing function.
By default, this identifier is not in use, i.e. it is not
configurable with the SCT. The selection list shows up to
ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected auto-reclosing tag. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
auto-reclosing on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
156
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use
the following naming convention:
The first three characters identify the substation.
The following four characters identify the bay.
The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:
GRB, station
GRBHA12BAY, bay
GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
157
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type
of the objects. The configurable attribute is being
enabled if the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has been
configured.
The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus
via LON-SPA Gateway (LSG), the station type should be
selected as SPACOM/SPANET (SPA).
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is
used, the station type should be selected as RED 500/
REx (LON).
OUTPUT_STATUS
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is need for output status process objects with the
DNP 3.0 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than DNP
3.0, the configurable attribute is being disabled, and the
value has no meaning.
158
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
data acquisition unit of the auto-reclosing. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module,
which connects the signals from the process to the
communication system, can be defined either by
selecting the unit from the selection list and editing it or
just by entering the type designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the
same type within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate
units by using additional characters. As an example, the
data acquisition units for a bay with SPAJ 140 C, SPAC
535 C3 and SACO 64D4:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always start with the
underscore (_) and then be followed by an unit
distinction character ranging from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there
is no more than one data acquisition unit of the same
type within the bay, the additional characters can be left
out.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
159
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
FUNCTION_BLOCK
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
function block (software module) of a data acquisition
unit that handles the signals for this picture function. If
the configurable attribute DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
does not specify such a device that contains function
blocks, or the attribute P_OBJECT_LN has not been
configured, this attribute is being disabled, and the value
has no meaning.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is
done by other means than SigTOOL.
Devices like REF 54x, REM 54x, REC 52x and REC 53x
utilize function blocks for configuration. If the name of the
function block does not exist in the selection list (a new
one), you may enter it yourself!
AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select the object
type for the indication auto-reclosing in progress. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured. The database
process objects will be created either as a binary input or
as an analog input depending on the selection.
SHOW_AR_IN_USE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the tag is
shown when the auto-reclosing is in use. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.
By default no tag is shown. This is useful when the auto-
reclosure is normally OFF and a warning should be
produced if the auto-reclosing is in use.
SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select if the tag is
shown when the auto-reclosing is not in use. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
P_OBJECT_LN has been configured.
By default no tag is shown. This is useful when the auto-
reclosure is normally ON and the warning should be
produced if the auto-reclosing is not in use.
EVENT_RECORDING
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether
there is a need for event recording process objects with
the RP 570 protocol. If STATION_TYPE is other than
RTU 2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs or P_OBJECT_LN has not
been configured, the configurable attribute is being
disabled, and the value has no meaning.
With RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes
into the event recording process object. If no accurate
time stamp is needed or available, or the device is
emulating the RP 570 without the event recording
possibility, do not set this attribute ON.
160
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN
The logical name of the database process objects of the
auto-reclosing module. The maximum length of the text
is 10 characters.
Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_). However, an object name cannot begin
with a digit or an underscore.
The configurable attributes LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN and
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE are utilized to create a
link between existing auto-reclosing objects from the
other LIB 5xx function (e.g. auto-reclosing module) and
the auto-reclosing tag. It even supports linking of user-
defined process objects as
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE is an editable selector.
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE
An editable selector type of a combo box to select the
type designation of the auto-reclosing module. The
configurable attribute is being enabled if the attribute
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_LN has been configured.
By default, all auto-reclosing modules from SPACOM
family have been implemented for the users to choose
from. The supported modules are:
SPCT 2C5
SPCT 2C17
SPCT 2D38
SPCT 2D46
SPCT 5D54
SPTO 6D3
During the relay installation and configuration, the
following indexes have to be created and SPACOM
events have to be enabled as a minimum requirement for
the auto-reclosing tag by using the SPACOM Relay
Configuration Tool:
SPCT 2C5
index 65 auto-reclosing started/reset (E1/E2)
SPCT 2C17
index 151 auto-reclosing started/reset (E1/E2)
SPCT 2D38
index 70 HSAR started/reset (E1/E2)
index 74 SSAR started/reset (E6/E7)
index 78 delayed SSAR started/reset (E11/E12)
SPCT 2D46
index 91 HSAR forward started/reset (E1/E2)
index 95 SSAR started/reset (E6/E7)
index 109 auto-reclosing interrupted (E25)
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
161
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
8.3.2.
Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool
AR_IN_PROGRESS_REPR
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the indication auto-reclosing
in progress. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector type of
the list called Library Representations.
By default, almost 10 different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for the
users to choose from.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make use of a representation of
your own. In that case the representation should be of the following selector type:
Auto-reclosing without multiple cycles (BI)
SPCT 5D54
index 32 auto-reclosing interrupted by ARINH (E30)
index 33 auto-reclosing interrupted manually (E31)
index 34 auto-reclosing interrupted by open cmd (E32)
index 40 shot 1 started/reset (channel 1 - E1/E2)
index 46 shot 2 started/reset (channel 2 - E1/E2)
index 52 shot 3 started/reset (channel 3 - E1/E2)
index 58 shot 4 started/reset (channel 4 - E1/E2)
index 64 shot 5 started/reset (channel 5 - E1/E2)
SPTO 6D3
index 16 auto-reclosing interrupted (E7)
index 17 auto-reclosing interrupted by open cmd (E8)
index 18 auto-reclosing interrupted by ARINH (E9)
index 20 shot 1 started/reset (E11/E12)
index 25 shot 2 started/reset (E16/E17)
index 30 shot 3 started/reset (E21/E22)
index 35 shot 4 started/reset (E26/E27)
index 40 shot 5 started/reset (E31/E32)
If there is no appropriate auto-reclosing module to pick,
or if freely defined process objects are going to be used,
it is possible to link those objects by using the following
syntax:
"IDENT","INDX1","REPR1","INDX2","REPR2", ...
IDENT = module ID - (used only as a comment)
INDX1 = DB index of "AR in progress" -object 1
REPR1 = representation (symbol set) for object 1
INDX2 = DB index of "AR in progress" -object 2
REPR2 = representation (symbol set) for object 2
As an example, the auto-reclosing module SPCT 2D46:
"SPCT
2D46","91","F_REPR/F_ARRUN4","95","F_REPR/
ARRUN5"
The type designation of the auto-reclosing module is not
necessary; it is just additional information for users.
162
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
Table 8.3.2-1
Auto-reclosing without multiple cycles (BI)
Auto-reclosing with multiple cycles (AI)
Table 8.3.2-2
Auto-reclosing with multiple cycles (AI)
The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:
F_REPR/AR_RUN
The predefined auto-reclosing in progress symbols have been justified to the left end
of the representation window.
)LJ
7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVLQJLQSURJUHVV
AR_IN_USE_REPR
Value
Meaning
-1
Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)
0
Auto-reclosing not in progress
1
Auto-reclosing in progress
Value
Meaning
-1
Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)
0
Auto-reclosing not in progress
1
Auto-reclosing shot 1 in progress
2
Auto-reclosing shot 2 in progress
3
...
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
163
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the indication auto-reclosing
in use/out of use. The predefined representation can be selected from the selector
type of list called Library Representations.
By default, two different kinds of symbol sets have been implemented for the users
to choose from.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to use a representation of your
own. In that case the representation should be of the following selector type:
Table 8.3.2-3
Selector Type
The name of the representation should be written to the selector with a logical path
if any, for example:
F_REPR/AR_USE
The predefined symbols have been justified to the left end of the representation
window.
)LJ
7KHGHIDXOWVHWRIUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVIRUWKHDXWRUHFORVLQJLQXVHRXWRIXVH
8.3.3.
Configurable attributes with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the auto-reclosing tag, the Process Object Tool
will create a certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects which
are going to be linked to an actual process should be edited to have a station number,
Value
Meaning
-1
Symbol identifier - (used only by tool)
0
Auto-reclose not in use
1
Auto-reclose in use
164
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise by default all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.
Table 8.3.3-1
The Process Object Tool will create process objects for
autoreclosing tag based on the following list
8.4.
Application engineering information
8.4.1.
The structure of the auto-reclosing tag
This chapter describes the structure of the auto-reclosing tag. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The
auto-reclosing tag is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0
and USE.
8.4.2.
Pictures
The following pictures are found for the auto-reclosing tag under the path /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)
Indicates if the auto-reclose is in use
(software switch of the auto-reclosing unit)
11
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)
Indicates if the auto-reclose is in use
(hardware switch of the auto-reclosing
unit)
12
Auto-reclosing in progress/not in
progress ind. (optional)
Indicates if there is an auto-reclosing
sequence running
13
Auto-reclosing interrupt command
(optional)
Interrupts the auto-reclosing sequence
14
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
command (optional)
Enables/disables the auto-reclosure
110
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.
111
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
indication (optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.
112
Auto-reclosing in progress/not in
progress ind. (optional)
Event recording object (for accurate time
stamp) with RTU 2xx/RP 570 type of
stations.
113
Auto-reclosing interrupt command
(optional)
Command termination object with IEC
870-5-101 and -103 type of stations.
Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.
114
Auto-reclosing in use/out of use
command (optional)
Command termination object with IEC
870-5-101 and -103 type of stations.
Output status object with DNP 3.0 type of
stations.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
165
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
Table 8.4.2-1
Pictures for the auto-reclosing tag
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 8.4.2-2
Pictures for the auto-reclosing tag
8.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the auto-
reclosing tag. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 8.4.3-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
8.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the auto-reclosing tag help text files. The path is /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 8.4.4-1
Auto-reclosing tag help text files
8.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Picture
Functionality
FPI_ARC2.PIC
Picture function for auto-reclosing tag
Picture
Functionality
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for printing single indication (BI) type of signals
in MV Process
FORM4FPAI1.PIC
Format picture for printing analog input (AI) type of signals in
MV Process
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for printing binary output (BO) type of signals in
MV Process
Text file
Functionality
FPI_ARC2.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing single indication (BI) type
of signals
FORM4FPAI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing analog input (AI) type of
signals
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing binary output (BO) type of
signals
Help file
Functionality
FPI_ARC2.HLP
Help file for auto-reclosing installation and configuration
166
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
8.
Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
Configuration Guide
Table 8.4.5-1
Configuration files used by the auto-reclosing tag
8.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the auto-reclosing tag. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/USE
Table 8.4.6-1
Text files used by the auto-reclosing tag
8.4.7.
Process objects
The following process objects will be created for the auto-reclosing tag.
Table 8.4.7-1
Process objects created for the auto-reclosing tag
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_ARC2.DAT
Contains the configuration data for the auto-reclosing tag when it is
created, modified or deleted by the configuration tools.
FPI_ARC2.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.
FPI_DAU.TXT
Contains the list of data acquisition units that are typically used by
MV Process.
FPI_FB.TXT
Contains the list of RED 500 function blocks that exist at the
moment.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too).
Text file
Functionality
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group ident.
10
BI
Auto-reclosing in use
Software switch
Optional
FPFARCISCE
11
BI
Auto-reclosing in use
Hardware switch
Optional
FPFARCISCE
12
BI or AI
Auto-reclosing in
progress
Optional
FPFARCIARC
13
BO
Auto-reclosing
interruption
Optional
FPFARCCINR
14
BO
AR in use/ out of use -
cmd
Optional
FPFARCCSCE
110
EVREC
Event recording for
auto-reclosing in use
Only RP570
Optional
FPFARCESCE
111
EVREC
Event recording for
auto-reclosing in use
Only RP570
Optional
FPFARCESCE
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
167
8. Auto-reclosing (AR)
tag
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
8
8.4.8.
Scale objects
At the first installation the auto-reclosing tag creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale).
For multiple shots with SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station the installation will
also create the scale FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale).
112
EVREC
Event recording for
aAuto-reclosing in
progress
Only RP570
Optional
FPFARCEARC
113
TERM / OS
Command termination
of auto-reclosing
interruption
Output status object
Only IEC 870-5-101 and
-103; Optional
Output status object
when station type is
DNP 3.0, optional
FPFARCTINR
114
TERM / OS
Command termination
of auto-reclosing in
use/ out of use –cmd
Output status object
Only IEC 870-5-101 and
-103; Optional
Output status object
when station type is
DNP 3.0, optional
FPFARCTSCE
Index
Obj. type
Process object
Remarks
Group ident.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
169
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9. Alarm indicator
9
9. Alarm
indicator
9.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
• RED 500/Rex (LON)
• RTU2xx (RP570)
• RTU2xx/FTABs (RP570)
• IEC 60870-5-101
• IEC 60870-5-103
• DNP 3.0
• MODBUS RTU
9.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of picture function for the MV Process alarm
indicator. The picture function for the alarm indicator is found in the directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4
installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Alarm indicator).
Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard
configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
9.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the alarm indicator to have full functionality, the LIB 500 Base needs to
be installed. If the value of the attribute TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’number’ is not linked,
it is recommended to install the following components:
1. Station
2. Bay
9.2.2.
Installation
The Alarm indicator picture function is available at small (1*1) size. The size of the
small Alarm indicator picture function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block).
The button frame is drawn out of this area.
Fig. 9.2.2.-1 presents the Alarm indicator picture function as a part of the complete
bay.
1MRS751887-MEN
170
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
9. Alarm indicator
Configuration Guide
)LJ
7\SLFDO$ODUPLQGLFDWRULQVWDOODWLRQ
Table 9.2.2-1
During the installation, the following information has to be
given
9.3.
Picture function configuration
9.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations required only once). The usage of object identification
(OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process object has to be
decided and the signal texts have to be translated into local language. For further
information, please refer to the General chapter in this MV Process Configuration
Manual.
9.3.2.
Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool
The Alarm indicator has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:
Table 9.3.2-1
The following attributes can be configured with the Standard
Configuration Tool
Attribute
Meaning
Default
ID
Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
obj.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
171
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9. Alarm indicator
9
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol
RED 500/Rex (LON)
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
The data acquisition unit towards
process
None
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’x’
The type of the input signal
SIGNAL’x’_TEXT
Identification for signal shown in event
lists, alarm list etc.
Not available
ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIG
NAL’x’
The state of the signal when an alarm
(warning) is activated.
Not available
LINK_SIGNAL’x’_LN
The logical name of the process
object to which the signal is linked.
Not available
LINK_SIGNAL’x’_IX
The index of the process object to
which the signal is linked.
Not available
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization group
MV_CONTROL
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without
button
With button
EVENT_RECORDING
Selection whether the event recording
process objects are created when the
RP570 protocol is used.
Not available
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the substation. By default, the maximum length of the text
is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database if there is any process object linked to the selected
alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute within a
picture function has meaning only when the process objects have
not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the alarm
indicator objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum length of the
text is 14 characters. The selection list shows up to ten latest
entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the alarm
indicator objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same bay (feeder).
Attribute
Meaning
Default
172
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
9. Alarm indicator
Configuration Guide
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter the
name (identifier) of the alarm indicator. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the alarm indicator on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER
_’nr’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the alarm indicator. By default, this identifier is
not in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The selection list
shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the process
object database, if there is any process object linked to the
selected alarm indicator. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the alarm
indicator on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The maximum
length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters are the
letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot have
the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important to have a
proper naming convention for the process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined naming
convention it is possible to collect all station and bay related
database objects without searching through the complete
database. Therefore, it is advisable to use the following naming
convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify the
source of the signal i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper naming
convention within one bay. The station name is Green Bay and the
bay name is HA12
Downtown:
GRB, station
GRBHA12BAY, bay
GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
173
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9. Alarm indicator
9
GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually takes
a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless the optional
named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being utilized to
introduce other required process objects.
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of the
objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station type
defined here. The list of supported protocols is as follows:
SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
RED 500 / REx (LON)
RTU2xx (RP570)
RTU2xx / FTABs (RP570)
IEC 870-5-101
IEC 870-5-103
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
If SPACOM device has been connected to the LON-bus via LON-
SPA Gateway (LSG), SPACOM/SPANET (SPA) should be selected
as the station type
If REx device (e.g. REF 541) with LON communication is used,
RED 500/REx (LON) should be selected as the station type
DATA_ACQUISITION_
UNIT
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the data
acquisition unit of the alarm indicator.
This selection is not obligatory if the signal engineering is done by
other means than SigTOOL.
The data acquisition unit, i.e. the device or module, which connects
the signals from the process to the communication system, can be
defined either by selecting the unit from the selection list and
editing it or just by entering the type designation.
If there are more than one data acquisition unit of the same type
within the bay, it is necessary to differentiate units by using
additional characters. As an example, the data acquisition units for
a bay with SPAJ
140 C, SPAC 535 C3 and SACO 64D4 are:
SPAJ 140 C
SPCJ4D29_1
SPAC 535 C3
SPCJ4D29_2
SPTO6D3 (or SPTO6D3_1)
SACO 64D4
SACO16D2_1
SACO16D2_2
SACO16D2_3
SACO16D2_4
The additional characters should always begin with the underscore
(_) and then be followed by an unit distinction character ranging
from 1 - 9, 0, A - Z. If there is no more than one data acquisition
unit of the same type within the bay, the additional characters can
be left out.
174
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
9. Alarm indicator
Configuration Guide
9.3.3.
Configuration with the Representation Tool
The Alarm indicator has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool:
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’ A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the signal. The
list of supported input signals is as follows:
Binary Input (BI)
Double Binary (DB)
Analog Input (AI)
Linked
If any of the first three choices is selected, the process objects are
created by using the Process Object Tool. When Linked is
selected, the logical name and the index of the process object
where the signal is connected to has to be given. When an empty
string is selected, it means that the signal is discarded by the alarm
indicator.
SIGNAL’nr’_TEXT
This text will be used as an identifier of the signal on event list,
alarm list, printouts etc.
ALARMING_STATE_O
F_SIGNAL’nr’
The alarming state of the signal is defined by this attribute. The
value of the attribute is related to the type of the signal. The
following examples clarify how this attribute should be defined.
- Type of signal is BI, alarming state is 1
value to be set: (1)
- Type of signal is DB, alarming states are 0 and 3
values to be set: (1,0,0,1)
- Type of signal is AI, high alarm = 12, high warning
= 10, low warning = 8, low alarm = 6
values to be set: (12,10,8,6)
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_
LN
The logical name of the process object to which signal is linked.
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_
IX
The index of the process object to which signal is linked.
AUTHORIZATION_GR
OUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL list
attribute name (see SCIL manual). The contents of the selection
list is taken from the existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters followed by
a number.
The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be included
in some authorization group. The authorization level of each user
in this group can be defined afterwards by the system manager
with User Management picture.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTT
ON
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the control
dialog(s) can be opened for the alarm indicator or not.
By default, the symbol is provided with an active button.
EVENT_RECORDING An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether there is need
for event recording process objects with the RP 570 protocol. If
STATION_TYPE is other than RTU 2xx or RTU 2xx/FTABs, the
configurable attribute is being disabled, and the value has no
meaning.
With the RP 570 the time stamp from process device comes into
the event recording process object. If no accurate time stamp is
needed or available, or the device is emulating the RP 570 without
an event recording possibility, do not set this attribute ON.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
175
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9. Alarm indicator
9
Table 9.3.3-1
The following attributes can be configured with the
Representation Tool
Table 9.3.3-2
The Alarm indicator requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions
By default, there are four sets of symbols for the Alarm indicator. These default
representations are shown below. Please note that in the actual system the symbols
representing selector 3 are blinking to draw attention.
Fig. 9.3.3.-1 presents the available A symbols for the Alarm indicator.
Table 9.3.3-3
Default representation for the A symbols
)LJ
$V\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in picture (Square
symbol)
F_REPR/F_ALIND1
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the alarm
indicator. The predefined representation can be selected from
the selector type of the list called Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and
use a representation set of your own. In that case it is possible
to copy one of the existing representation sets to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the
application and modify each representation as needed. If object
specific representations are needed, the representation set
(under the application) can be renamed, and the name of the
representation may be written to the selector with the logical
path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Selector
Condition
Default color
1
Selected on monitor
white
2
Update blocked, invalid value, obsolete value, device not
synchronized or overflow
magenta
3
Unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Acknowledged alarm
red
5
Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
6
Manually entered or substituted
cyan
7
Normal state
green
8
Substituted, internal or external
Dark blue
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_ALIND1
small
176
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
9. Alarm indicator
Configuration Guide
Fig. 9.3.3.-2 presents the available led symbols for the Alarm indicator.
Table 9.3.3-4
Default representation for the led symbols
)LJ
/HGV\PEROIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU
Fig. 9.3.3.-3 presents the available bell symbols for the Alarm indicator.
Table 9.3.3-5
Default representation for the bell symbols
)LJ
%HOOV\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU
Fig. 9.3.3.-4 presents the available star symbols for the Alarm indicator.
Table 9.3.3-6
Default representation for the star symbols
)LJ
6WDUV\PEROVIRUWKH$ODUPLQGLFDWRU
9.3.4.
Configuration with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the Alarm indicator, the Process Object Tool will
create a certain set of process objects in the database. Those process objects which
are going to be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number,
an address and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes
should have suitable values for normal operation.
If the value of the attribute TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’ is linked, the process object is
not created by the process object tool, but the name and the index of the signal is
given to the attributes LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_LN and
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_IX.
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_ALIND2
small
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_ALIND3
small
Symbol
Size
F_REPR/F_ALAIND4
small
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
177
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
9. Alarm indicator
9
Table 9.3.4-1
The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list
9.3.5.
An example of the alarm indicator configuration
Table 9.3.5-1
The alarm indicator configuration
9.4.
Application engineering information
9.4.1.
The structure of the alarm indicator
This chapter describes the structure of the alarm indicator. All pictures, form
pictures, help and other text files as well as all database objects are included. Alarm
indicator function is a part of the MV Process of the LIB 510 and has a directory /
LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST,
LANG0 and USE.
9.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all alarm indicator pictures and a short description of their
functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 9.4.2-1
The alarm indicator pictures and their functionality
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10...17
Alarm indication
Used for indication of the alarming state of the signal.
Attribute
Value
ID
BAY5_AI
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Outgoing HA5
DEVICE_NAME
AI
P_OBJECT_LN
EST_HA5AI
STATION_TYPE
RED 500/Rex (LON)
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
REF541
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL1
Binary Input (BI)
SIGNAL1_TEXT
SF6 low pressure
ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL1
(1)
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Yes
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_ALIND2 (led)
Picture
Functionality
FPI_AIT.PIC
Type picture function for alarm indicator
FPI_AII_S.PIC
Small picture function (1*1) for alarm indicator
178
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
9. Alarm indicator
Configuration Guide
Table 9.4.2-2
The alarm indicator pictures and their functionality
9.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the alarm
indicator. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0
Table 9.4.3-1
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
9.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the alarm indicator help text files.
The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 9.4.4-1
Alarm indicator help text files
9.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the alarm indicator. The path is LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 9.4.5-1
Configuration files used by the alarm indicator
Picture
Functionality
FPU_AIA.PIC
Main control dialog
FPU_AIB.PIC
Time stamp dialog
FPU_AIC.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_AID.PIC
Blockings dialog
FORM4FPBI1
Format picture for printing the alarm for binary input signal.
FORM4FPDB1
Format picture for printing the alarm for double binary input signal.
FORM4FPAI1
Format picture for printing the alarm for analog input signal.
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AI.TXT
Text file for all alarm indicator dialogs
Help file
Functionality
FPI_AI.HLP
Picture function installation help file
FPU_AIA.HLP
Alarm indicator control dialog help file
FPU_AIB.HLP
Last Alarm dialog help file
FPU_AIC.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
FPU_AID.HLP
Blockings dialog help file
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_AI.DAT
Contains the configuration data for alarm indicator when it is cre-
ated, modified or deleted by configuration tools.
FPI_AI.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object
Tool.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation
tool (common for all other picture functions, too).
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
179
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
10. REC
501
10.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SPANET (SPA)
• ANSI
• RP570
10.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of the picture function for the MV Process
REC 501. The picture function for REC 501 is found in the directory /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation
procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/REC 501). Configuration of this picture
function shall be performed by using standard configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool.
10.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the REC 501 to have full functionality, the following components need
to be installed:
• Base
• Station *
• Bay *
* When REC 501 is configured to work as stand-alone, bay and station picture
functions are not obligatory.
10.2.2.
Installation
There are three different sizes of the REC 501 picture functions: small (1*1),
medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small REC 501 picture function is 16
x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pix-
els (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x
3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.
It is
QRW recommended to use the medium size of the picture function within the
same bay with a small or a large picture functions because of the different snap of
the feeder lines.
Fig. 10.2.2.-1 presents the REC 501 controlling the RMU station.
1MRS751887-MEN
180
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
)LJ 508ZLWK5(&
Table 10.2.2-1 During the installation, the following information has to be
given
10.3.
Picture function configuration
10.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (configurations required only once). The usage of the
object identification (OI)-attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the
process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into local
language has to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General
chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.
10.3.2.
Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool
The REC 501 has the following attributes to configure with the Standard
Configuration Tool:
Table 10.3.2-1 Configurable attributes
Attribute
Meaning
Default
ID
Name/Identification of the picture function within the picture
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
COMMON_BAY_NAME
Bay name for the common process
objects
-
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’num
ber’
Special identifier to the object.
Depending on the system
configuration up to three special
identifiers can be used.
-
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of process objects
-
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYP
E
The type of the controlled switching
device
Normal disconnector
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
181
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PUR
POSE
The purpose of the controlled
switching device
Disconnector
SWITCH_SECTION
Selection for controlled object within
REC 501
Switching device 1
STATION_TYPE
The type of control device & protocol SPACOM/SPANET
(SPA)
DEVICE_USE
Selection for device to work as a
station or as a slave in a station
-
STATION_ADDRESS
Station address of REC 501
0
STATION_LR_SWITCH
Binary input working as station local
remote switch
BI (7/8)
STATION_LR_POLARITY
Polarity of the station local remote
switch
Local=0, Remote=1
COMMUNICATION
Communication type between REC
501 and MicroSCADA
CONTINUOUS
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
telephone number of REC 501
-
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without
button (not in network topology Line
Disconnector picture function)
TRUE
PULSE_COUNTER
The selection of creating process
object for pulse counter
FALSE
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization group MV_CONTROL
MOTORIZED
Selection for motorized or manually
operated
TRUE
COMPACT_INSTALLATION
Is the disconnector is installed over
the busbar
FALSE
U_INTERLOCKING
User specific interlocking program
U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS
Field texts for binary input dialog.
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter thename of the substation. By default, the
maximum length of the text is 9 characters. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the
switching device objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same substation.
182
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the
maximum length of the text is 14 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
REC 501 objects on event list, alarm list, printout,
database query, etc. It is very important that this text is
similar to all objects within the same bay (feeder).
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter the name (identifier) of the REC 501. By default,
the maximum length of the text is 5 characters. The
selection list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the REC 501 on
event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’number
’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or
enter a special identifier of the REC 501. By default, this
identifier isnot in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the
SCT. The selectionlist shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database, if there is any process object
linked to the selected REC 501. Therefore, the
configurable attribute within a picture function has
meaning only when the process objects have not been
created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the
REC 501 on event list, alarm list, printout, database
query, etc.
COMMON_BAY_NAME
Special bay name for common process objects (indexes
32-48).If REC 501 unit controls only one switching device
BAY_NAME and COMMON_BAY name has to be same.
If both objects are used they should be configured to
have different bay name and shared common bay name.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
183
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The
maximumlength of the text is 10 characters. Allowed
characters are the letters A-Z, all digits and the
underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughoutthe entire system, that is, different objects
cannot have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very
important to have a proper naming convention for the
process object database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up
the opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined
naming convention it is possible to collect all station and
bay related database objects without searching through
the complete database. Therefore, it is advised to use
the following naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of the
proper naming convention within one bay. The station
name is Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12
Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the type of the
switching device controlled by REC 501 unit. By default,
the type is a disconnector.
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPO
SE
A selector type of a combo box to select the purpose of
the switching device.
The configurable attribute has only an informative
purpose, since by default, it is not used by any function
within LIB 5xx. The attribute is being stored into the
process object database (to the 25th or 26th character of
the RX attribute) for user-defined purposese.g. for
special search condition on the alarm or event list.
SWITCH_SECTION
Within REC 501 there are two objects. With the help of
the attribute SWITCH_SECTION it is possible to select
the object used for controlling the switching device. If
both objects within REC 501 are used, picture functions
for them are installed separately under the same logical
name.
184
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type
of the process objects.
The database process objects will be created for the
station type defined here. The list of supported protocols
is as follows:
- SPACOM / SPANET (SPA)
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
- RP570
DEVICE_USE
A selector type of a combo box to select whether the
REC 501 unit is a stand-alone device or a spa-slave.
The difference between these two choices is the handling
of the station and bay local/remote switches. When REC
501 unit is configured as a slave, station and bay picture
functions are obligatory and the local/remote indication is
read from them.
STATION_ADDRESS
The unit number of station.
STATION_LR_SWITCH
Identification for binary input object used as station local/
remote switch. The information is taken from this binary
input when REC 501 is working as a stand alone device
(DEVICE_USE = station).
STATION_LR_POLARITY
The polarity of the station local/remote-switch input
signal.
COMMUNICATION
The communication type used between MicroSCADA
and REC 501. Continuous = communication active all the
time
During = communication is activated only when operating
(when control dialog is opened line is set in use)
Dial-up = The control dialog makes the call to the
substation (line is configured as an autocaller line)
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
The telephone number of the REC 501. This selection is
relevant only when DIAL_UP communication is selected.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select whether the
control dialog(s) can be opened for the object.
By default the symbol is provided with an active button.
PULSE_COUNTER
Selection whether the process objects for pulse counter
are created.
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the
authorization group for the object. The maximum length
of the text is 63 characters. The given text has to be
usable as a SCIL list attribute name (see SCIL manual).
The contents of the selection list is taken from the
existing authorization groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters
followed by a number.
The attribute can be defined, if the object is wanted to be
included in some authorization group. The authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined afterwards
by the system manager with User Management pictures.
MOTORIZED
An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select if the object is
motorized and can be controlled remotely by SCS/
MicroSCADA.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
185
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
COMPACT_INSTALLATION
An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select if the
disconnector is installed over the busbar (compact
installation). This selection is not obligatory if the
topological busbar coloring is not used.
U_INTERLOCKING
An optional named program which is designed for the
internal interlocking purpose.
With this internal interlocking program it is possible to
make control buttons insensitive if required. It is also
capable of generating interlocking cause messages to
the information bar of the control dialog.
As an example a simple interlocking program which
checks if the earth switch is open before allowing the
control commands for the circuit breaker controlled by
REC 501.
;******For interlocking purposes only!******
;
; by this program you can create internal
; interlockings by SCIL
;
; as OUTPUT you can give variables:
;
; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)
; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)
; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,
; text, cause to be shown on the dialog
information bar
;
; None of these is obligatory!
;
;*****************************************
;earth switch Q9 not open
#IF GRB_HA12Q9:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK
#IF GRB_HA12Q9:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Earth
switch Q9 not open"
#BLOCK_END
#BLOCK_END
#ELSE #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Earth
switch Q9 not updated"
#BLOCK_END
.U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS
This program provides a possibility to write an optional
identification for binary inputs represented in binary
inputs dialog.
The field texts are written between the quotation marks.
The length of identification texts depends on the free
space in binary inputs dialog.
If there is no texts defined by this program the default
texts are taken in use. (Input X2 (1/2) ... )
186
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
10.3.3.
Configuration with the Representation Tool
The REC 501 function has the following attributes to configure with the
Representation Tool.
Table 10.3.3-1 Configurable attributes
Representation symbols can be seen in other MV process documents. REC 501 pro-
vides representation set for all switching devices in the MV process.
Table 10.3.3-2 The REC 501 requires a selector and a symbol for the
following conditions
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in picture
F_REPR/F_DISC1(Diamond
symbol)
REPRESENTATION
The representation set presented by the representation tool is
related to the configurable attribute SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE,
hence depending on the configuration the representation set can be
for disconnectors, breakers, earthing switches or trucks.
The name of the representation (symbol set) that is used for the
switching device state indication. The name of the representation
can be selected in the combo box called Representation. The
selected symbol is shown in the preview window.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and use
a representation set of your own. In that case you can copy one of
the existing representation sets to a representation file ../
APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under the application and modify
each representation as needed. If object specific representations
are needed, then you can rename the representation set (under the
application) and write the name of the representation to the selector
with logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Selector
Condition
Default color
0
Intermediate; selected, under command
white, blinking
1
Intermediate; selected on command
white
2
Intermediate; update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
3
Intermediate; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Intermediate; acknowledged alarm
red
5
Intermediate; warning or blockings (alarms, events,
printouts or reprocessing)
yellow
6
Intermediate; manually entered
cyan
7
Intermediate; control blocked
brown
8
Intermediate; normal state
green
10
Closed; selected, under command
white, blinking
11
Closed; selected on command
white
12
Closed; update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
13
Closed; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
187
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
10.3.4.
Configuration with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the REC 501, the Process Object Tool will create
a certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects, which are going
to be linked to the actual process, should be edited to have a station number, an
address and a proper switch state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes should
have suitable values for normal operation.
14
Closed; acknowledged alarm
red
15
Closed; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
16
Closed; manually entered
cyan
17
Closed; control blocked
brown
18
Closed; normal state
green
20
Open; selected, under command
white, blinking
21
Open; selected on command
white
22
Open; update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
23
Open; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
24
Open; acknowledged alarm
red
25
Open; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
26
Open; manually entered
cyan
27
Open; control blocked
brown
28
Open; normal state
green
30
Faulty; selected, under command
white, blinking
31
Faulty; selected on command
white
32
Faulty; update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
33
Faulty; unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
34
Faulty; acknowledged alarm
red
35
Faulty; warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
36
Faulty; manually entered
cyan
37
Faulty; control blocked
brown
38
Faulty; normal state
green
40
Unknown; selected, under command
white, blinking
41
Unknown; selected on command
white
42
Unknown; not sampled or object missing
magenta
Selector
Condition
Default color
188
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
Table 10.3.4-1 The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Position indication
Used for indication of the REC 501 state open /close
/intermediate/faulty.
11
Open command
Used for sending Open select command of the
disconnector section to the control unit.
12
Close command
Used for sending Close select command of the
disconnector section to the control unit
13
Execute command
Used for sending Execute command to the control
unit.
14
Cancel command
Used for sending Cancel command to the control
unit.
15
Operation counter
Used for monitoring the number of object state
changes.
16
Operation counter reset
Used for sending the reset operation counter
command to the control unit.
17
Pulse counter
Used for monitoring the pulse counter values.
18
Reset pulse counter
Used for sending the reset pulse counter command
to control unit.
19
Selected on monitor
In internal use, tags the selection of the object made
in different pictures or monitors.
20
Command event
In internal use.
21-31
*
32
Binary input X2 (1/2)
Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.
33
Binary input X2 (3/2)
Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.
34
Binary input X2 (4/5)
Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.
35
Binary input X2 (6/5)
Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.
36
Binary input X2 (7/8)
Used for monitoring the state of the binary input.
37
Battery voltage level low
Used for monitoring the battery voltage level
38
Power supply
temperature
Used for monitoring the power supply temperature
39
Auxiliary supply
Used for monitoring the state of auxiliary supply.
40
Heating ON/OFF
Used for monitoring the state of the heating.
41
Temperature
Used for monitoring the temperature value.
42
Battery charging voltage
Used for monitoring the state of the battery charging
voltage.
43
Minimum battery voltage
Used for monitoring the state of the minimum battery
voltage.
44
Reset minimum battery
voltage
Used for sending the command Reset minimum
battery voltage to the control unit.
45
Battery test
Used for sending Start battery test command to the
control unit.
46
Heating setting value
Used for monitoring the heating setting value.
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
189
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
*) Indexes from 21 .. 31 are similar to indexes 10 .. 20 and they are created if
SWITCH_SECTION attribute is defined as Switching device 2 during the
configuring phase.
10.4.
Application engineering information
10.4.1.
The structure of REC 501
This document describes the structure of REC 501. All pictures, form pictures, help
and other text files as well as all database objects are included. The REC 501
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.
10.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all REC 501 pictures and a short description of their
functionality. The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 10.4.2-1 REC 501 pictures
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 10.4.2-2 REC 501 pictures
47
Heating set-point
Used for sending Heating limit command to the
control unit.
48
REC 501 Blockings
Used for printouts of blocking operations. Internal
use only.
49
Used for reading transparent SPA messages from
the slave unit
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Picture
Functionality
FPI_C501.PIC
REC 501 picture function (1*1)
FPI_C501M.PIC
REC 501 picture function (2*2)
FPI_C501L.PIC
REC 501 picture function (3*3)
Picture
Functionality
FPU_C501A.PIC
REC 501 main control dialog
FPU_C501B.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_C501C.PIC
Forced operation dialog
FPU_C501D.PIC
State settings dialog
FPU_C501E.PIC
Combo list for state settings dialog
FPU_C501F.PIC
Blockings dialog
FPU_C501G.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_C501H.PIC
Operation counter dialog
FPU_C501I.PIC
Data dialog
FPU_C501J.PIC
Binary inputs dialog
190
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
10.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the REC 501
and the path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0:
Table 10.4.3-1 Text Translation Tool compatible text files.
10.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the REC 501 help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 10.4.4-1 REC 501 help text files
FPU_C501K.PIC
Object messages dialog
FPU_C501L.PIC
Pulse counter dialog
FPU_C501M.PIC
Combo list for alarm state dialog
FPU_C501N.PIC
Clock synchronization dialog
FPU_C501O.PIC
Combo list for Clock sync. dialog
FPU_C501P.PIC
General info dialog
FPU_C501R.PIC
Update process data dialog
FPU_C501S.PIC
Conn. to Relay Setting Tool dialog
FPU_C501T.PIC
Program versions dialog
FPU_C501U.PIC
Control authority dialog
FPU_C501V.PIC
Position simulation dialog
FORM4FDB1.PIC
Format picture for position indication
FORM4FBO1.PIC
Format picture for open select cmd., Close select cmd,
Cancel cmd. And Execute cmd.
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for binary input objects.
Picture
Functionality
Text file
Functionality
FPI_C501.TXT
Object texts for process objects
FPU_C501.TXT
Dialog texts
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for position indication
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for open select cmd., Close select cmd, Cancel
cmd. And Execute cmd.
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for binary input objects.
Help file
Functionality
FPI_C501.HLP
Installation help for REC 501
FPU_C501A.HLP
Help for main control dialog
FPU_C501C.HLP
Help for main forced operation dialog
FPU_C501D.HLP
Help for state settings dialog
FPU_C501F.HLP
Help for blockings dialog
FPU_C501G.HLP
Help for alarm state dialog
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
191
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
10.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the REC 501 and the path is /LIB4/
FMOD/ MVPROCESS/INST:
Table 10.4.5-1 Configuration files used by REC 501
10.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the REC 501 function. The paths are /LIB4/
FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 10.4.6-1 Text files used by the REC 501 function
Table 10.4.6-2 Text files used by the REC 501 function
FPU_C501H.HLP
Help for operation counter dialog
FPU_C501I.HLP
Help for data dialog
FPU_C501K.HLP
Help for object messages dialog
FPU_C501L.HLP
Help for pulse counter dialog
FPUI_C501N.HLP
Help for clock synchronizarion dialog
FPU_C501R.HLP
Help for update process data dialog
FPU_C501S.HLP
Help for Relay Setting tool dialog
Help file
Functionality
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_C501.DAT
Conf. data file
FPI_C501.POT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process
Object Tool.
INDEX4_F1.TXT
Selections list of MV-process picture functions for LIB4
installation tool
Text file
Functionality
FPU_C501ST.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
FPU_C501CH.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
FPU_C501SY.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
FPU_C5AUTH.TXT
Local / remote authorization service
FPU_SELECT.TXT
Selection service
FPU_EXEC.TXT
Execution service
FPU_CANCEL.TXT
Cancellation service
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Update process data service
Text file
Functionality
FPU_C501ST.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
FPU_C501CH.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
FPU_C501SY.TXT
Command procedure for clock sync.
192
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
and the path /’apl’/PICT/
Table 10.4.6-3 Text files used by the REC 501 function
10.4.7.
Process objects
In the table below, there are listed indexes of process object, data type, purpose,
Group identifier (RX-attribute), SPA parameter and ANSI- address where the
process object is linked.
Table 10.4.7-1 Process objects
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This
code is executed by the main control dialog for the switching
device.
FPU_SW_SEL.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Open or Close
selection command to the switching device. This code is
executed by the main control dialog.
FPU_SW_EXE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Execute command to
the switching device. This code is executed by the main
control dialog.
FPU_SW_CAN.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for sending Cancel command to the
switching device. This code is executed by the main control
dialog.
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when
they are update-deblocked. This code is executed by the
command procedure FPU_UPDATE.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
Text file
Functionality
Text file
Functionality
FPU_C501S.TXT
Stations included in the clock sync
Index
Data type
Process object
Group ident.
SPA
ANSI
10
DB
Object 1 Position
indication
FPQD01IPOS
I3
0, (750 EV)
11
BO
Object 1 Open select
command
FPQD01COBC
V1
500
12
BO
Object 1 Close select
command
FPQD01COBC
V2
502
13
BO
Object 1 Execute
command
FPQD01COBC
V3
506
14
BO
Object 1 Cancel
command
FPQD01COBC
V4
508
15
AI
Object 1 Operation
counter
FPQD01ICNR
V5
504
16
AO
Object 1 Reset
operation counter
FPQD01SCNR
V5
104
17
PC
Object 1 Pulse counter FPQD01MMSC
V20
1010
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
193
10. REC 501
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
10
18
BO
Object 1 Reset pulse
counter
FPQD01CMSC
-
-
19
AI
Object 1 Selected on
monitor
FPQD01XMEV
-
-
20
BI
Object 1 Command
event
FPQD01XCEV
-
-
21
DB
Object 2 Position
indication
FPQD01IPOS
I3
1,(753 EV)
22
BO
Object 2 Open select
command
FPQD01COBC
V1
501
23
BO
Object 2 Close select
command
FPQD01COBC
V2
503
24
BO
Object 2 Execute
command
FPQD01COBC
V3
507
25
BO
Object 2 Cancel
command
FPQD01COBC
V4
509
26
AI
Object 2 Operation
counter
FPQD01ICNR
V5
505
27
AO
Object 2 Reset
operation counter
FPQD01SCNR
V5
105
28
PC
Object 2 Pulse counter FPQD01MMSC
V20
1012
29
BO
Object 2 Reset pulse
counter
FPQD01CMSC
-
-
30
AI
Object 2 Selected on
monitor
FPQD01XMEV
-
-
31
BI
Object 2 Command
event
FPQD01XCEV
-
-
32
BI
BI 1
FPQD01ISCE
I4
2
33
BI
BI 2
FPQD01ISCE
I5
3
34
BI
BI 3
FPQD01ISCE
I6
4
35
BI
BI 4
FPQD01ISCE
I7
5
36
BI
BI 5
FPQD01ISCE
I8
6
37
BI
Battery voltage level
FPQD01IALA
I11
7
38
BI
Power supply
temperature
FPQD01IALA
I9
8
39
BI
Auxiliary supply
connection state
FPQD01IALA
I10
9
40
BI
Heating ON / OFF
FPQD01ISCE
I12
-
41
AI
Temperature
FPQD01MTMP
I1
1000
42
AI
Battery charging
voltage
FPQD01MVOL
I2
1002
43
AI
Minimum battery
voltage
FPQD01MVOL
V6
1004
44
BO
Minimum battery
voltage reset
FPQD01CVOL
V7
510
Index
Data type
Process object
Group ident.
SPA
ANSI
194
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
10. REC 501
Configuration Guide
10.4.8.
Scale objects
At the first installation, REC 501 creates the scale 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale). For ANSI
type of station, the scale FPU_1_10 (linear 1:10 scale) will also be created at the
installation.
10.4.9.
Command procedures
At the first installation, REC 501 creates the following command procedures:
FPU_UPDATE, which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked.
This feature is similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created at the installation. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates
position indication double binary from an analog input.
The first use of clock sync. dialog creates the following command
procedures:FPU_C501ST, FPU_C501CH, FPU_C501SY, which handles the
cyclical clock synchronisation of REC 501 stations.
When the selected station type is RP 570, a command procedure FPU_C501RD is
created for activating the decoding of the transparent spa message.
10.4.10.
Event channels
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.
The event channel FPU_C501RD is created for activating the command procedure
FPU_C501RD.
10.4.11.
Time channels
The first use of the clock sync. dialog creates the following time channel:
FPU_C501SY, which activates the command procedure FPU_C501ST
45
BO
Active battery test
FPQD01CMSC
V8
-
46
AI
Heating setting value
FPQD01MTMP
S3
-
47
AO
Heating setpoint
FPQD01STMP
S3
-
48
AI
REC 501 blockings
FPQD01XBLK
_
-
49
BS
Transparent spa
communication
Index
Data type
Process object
Group ident.
SPA
ANSI
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
195
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
11. DTU
11.1.
Communication support
• SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
11.2.
Picture function installation
This chapter describes the installation of the picture function for the MV Process.
The picture function for DTU is found in the directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPRO-
CESS/INST and it should be installed by using LIB4 installation procedures. The
configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using standard configu-
ration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
11.2.1.
Environmental requirements
In order for the DTU to have full functionality, LIB 500 Base needs to be installed.
11.2.2.
Installation
There are three different sizes of the DTU picture function: small (1*1), medium
(2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small DTU picture function is 16 x 20 pixels
(1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2
semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3 semi-
graphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this area.
It is not recommended that the medium size of the picture function is used within
the same bay with small or large picture functions because of the different snap of
the feeder lines. Fig. 11.2.2.-1 presents the DTU picture functions.
)LJ 7\SLFDO'78LQVWDOODWLRQ
Table 11.2.2-1 During the installation the following information has to be
given
Attribute
Meaning
Default
ID
Name/Identification of the picture function within picture
-
1MRS751887-MEN
196
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
11.3.
Picture function configuration
11.3.1.
Preliminary work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparations are
required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The usage of object
identification (OI) attribute has to be fixed, the naming convention of the process
object has to be decided and the translation of the signal texts into local language has
to be performed. For further information, please refer to the General chapter in this
MV Process Configuration Manual.
11.3.2.
Configuration with the Standard Configuration Tool
The DTU has the following attributes to configure with the Standard Configuration
Tool:
Table 11.3.2-1 Configurable attributes with the Standard Configuration Tool
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
DEVICE_NAME
Name of the device
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
Not configurable
P_OBJECT_LN
Logical name of database process
obj.
STATION_TYPE
The communication protocol
SPACOM/SRIO (ANSI)
STATION_NUMBER
The station number of DTU
0
DTU_TYPE
The type of DTU
DTU 1
DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER Disconnector section at DTU 4
1
COMMUNICATION
Used communication method
CONTINUOUS
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
Telephone number of DTU when
dial-up communication is used
DUMMY
CONNECTION_AT_SELECT
ION
Is the connection opened when
control dialog is opened.
TRUE
SPEF
Selection for fault indicator SPEF
FALSE
STATION_NUMBER_SPEF
Station number of fault indicator
0
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Selection of symbol with or without
button (not in network topology
Line Disconnector picture function)
TRUE
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
The name of the authorization
group
MV_CONTROL
U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS
Field texts for extra inputs dialog
U_INTERLOCKING
User-specific interlocking program
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
197
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum length
of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows up to ten
latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a substation identifier of the DTU
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the DTU
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
It is very important that this text is similar to all objects within
the same bay (feeder).
DEVICE_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name (identifier) of the DTU. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 5 characters. The selection list shows up
to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an identifier of the DTU on event
list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter a
special identifier of the DTU. By default, this identifier is not
in use, i.e. it is not configurable with the SCT. The selection
list shows up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the pro-
cess object database, if there is any process object linked to
the selected DTU. Therefore, the configurable attribute
within a picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created.
This text will be used as an additional identifier of the DTU
on event list, alarm list, printout, database query, etc.
198
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
P_OBJECT_LN
The logical name of the database process objects. The max-
imum length of the text is 10 characters. Allowed characters
are the letters A-Z, all digits and the underscore (_).
The logical names of process objects have to be unique
throughout the entire system, that is, different objects cannot
have the same logical name. Therefore, it is very important
to have a proper naming convention for the process object
database.
Certain naming convention is also required to speed up the
opening time of the main dialogs. With the predefined nam-
ing convention it is possible to collect all station and bay
related database objects without searching through the com-
plete database. Therefore, it is advised to use the following
naming convention:
- The first three characters identify the substation
- The following four characters identify the bay
- The last three characters can be freely used to identify
the source of the signal, i.e. device, unit, etc.
The following list is presented as an example of a proper
naming convention within one bay. The station name is
Green Bay, and the bay name is HA12 Downtown:
- GRB, station
- GRBHA12BAY, bay
- GRBHA12Q0, circuit breaker Q0
- GRBHA12Q1, truck Q1
- GRBHA12Q9, earth switch Q9
- GRBHA12CT, measurements/current transformer
- GRBHA12VT, measurements/voltage transformer
- GRBHA12ALA, alarm indicator
- GRBHA12AR, auto-reclosing tag
- GRBHA12TRP, tripping tag
- GRBHA12R1, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12R2, feeder terminal or protection unit 1
- GRBHA12LS1, line segment 1 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS2, line segment 2 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LS3, line segment 3 of busbar coloring
- GRBHA12LI, line indicator of busbar coloring
If some other naming convention than 3+4 is used, it usually
takes a longer time to open the main control dialogs unless
the optional named program U_OTHER_OBJECTS is being
utilized to introduce other required process objects.
If DTU 4 is selected, the different disconnectors must be
installed under the same logical name.
STATION_TYPE
A selector type of a combo box to select the station type of
the objects.
The database process objects will be created for the station
type defined here. The list of supported protocols is as fol-
lows:
- SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
199
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
STATION_NUMBER
The station number of DTU. This will be used when the data-
base is created, so it is important that STA type of station
exists for the given station number.
DTU_TYPE
A selector type of combo box to select DTU 1 or DTU 4 to be
controlled.
DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER Selection for the switch section (1..4) when DTU 4 is con-
cerned.
COMMUNICATION
Communication method used between DTU station and
MicroSCADA.
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
Telephone number of DTU station. This must be configured
when dial-up communication is used.
CONNECTION_AT_SELECT
ION
An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the con-
nection is opened to the station when the DTU control dialog
is opened or not.
SPEF
Selection for SPEF fault indicator. If SPEF is selected it is
possible to open setting dialogs from main control dialog.
STATION_NUMBER_SPEF
The station number of SPEF fault indicator.
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
A selector type of an editable combo box to select the autho-
rization group for the object. The maximum length of the text
is 63 characters. The given text has to be usable as a SCIL
list attribute name (see the SCIL manual). The contents of
the selection list is taken from the existing authorization
groups.
NOTE! The name may not be composed of two letters fol-
lowed by a number.
By default, all DTU functions will be included in the same
authorization group. A new authorization group can be
defined, if the DTU is wanted to be included in some user-
defined authorization group. Afterwards the authorization
level of each user in this group can be defined by the system
manager with User Management pictures.
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
An ON/OFF-type of toggle button to select whether the con-
trol dialog(s) can be opened for the DTU. By default the sym-
bol is provided with active button. (not in network topology
Line Disconnector picture function).
U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS
User can define identification texts for extra binary and ana-
log inputs presented in extra inputs dialog.
200
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
11.3.3.
Configuration with the Representation Tool
The DTU has the following attributes to configure with the Representation Tool:
Table 11.3.3-1 Configurable attributes with the Representation Tool
U_INTERLOCKING
An optional named program which is designed for the inter-
nal interlocking purpose. With this internal interlocking pro-
gram it is possible to make control buttons insensitive if
required. It is also capable of generating interlocking cause
messages to the information bar of the control dialog.
As an example a simple interlocking program which checks
if the breaker is open before allowing the control commands
for disconnector.
; ************ For interlocking purposes only!
****************
;
; by this program You can create internal
; interlockings by SCIL
;
; as OUTPUT you can give variables:
;
; @OPEN_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then opening gets disabled)
; @CLOSE_INTERLOCKED,
; boolean, (if true then closing gets disabled)
; @INTERLOCKING_CAUSE,
; text, cause to be shown on the dialog infobar
;
; None of these is obligatory!
;
;************************************************
*
; breaker Q0 not open
#IF GRB_HA12Q0:POS10==0 #THEN #BLOCK
#IF GRB_HA12Q0:POV10<>2 #THEN #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - breaker
Q0 not open"
#BLOCK_END
#BLOCK_END
#ELSE #BLOCK
@OPEN_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@CLOSE_INTERLOCKED = TRUE
@INTERLOCKING_CAUSE = "Interlocked - Breaker Q0
not updated"
#BLOCK_END
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in picture (Diamond
symbol)
F_REPR/F_DISC1
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
201
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
11.3.4.
Configuration with the Process Object Tool
Depending on the configuration of the DTU, the Process Object Tool will create a
certain set of process objects in the database. The process objects which are going to
be linked to the actual process should be edited to have a station number, an address
and a proper switching state. Otherwise, by default, all other attributes should have
suitable values for normal operation.
Table 11.3.4-1 The Process Object Tool will create process objects based on
the following list
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) that is used for
the switching device state indication. The name of the
representation can be selected in the combo box called
Representation. The selected symbol is shown in the
preview window.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make
and use a representation set of your own. In that case one of
the existing representation sets can be copied to a
representation file ../APLMOD4/USE/APLMOD4.PIR under
the application and each representation may be modified as
needed. If object specific representations are needed, you
can rename the representation set (under the application)
and write the name of the representation to the selector with
the logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Index
Explanation
Purpose
10
Switch 1 position
indication (DTU 1&4)
Used for indication of the switch 1 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty
11
Switch 1 open command
(DTU 1&4)
Used for sending Open command to the switch1.
12
Switch 1 close command
(DTU 1&4)
Used for sending Close command to the switch 1.
13
Switch 1 local remote
(DTU 1&4)
Used for indication of switch1 local/remote switch.
14
Switch 1 selection on
monitor (DTU 1&4)
In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.
15
Switch 2 position
indication (DTU 4)
Used for indication of the switch 2 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty
16
Switch 2 open command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Open command to the switch 2.
17
Switch 2 close command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Close command to the switch 2.
18
Switch 2 local remote
(DTU 4)
Used for indication of switch 2 local/remote switch.
19
Switch 3 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)
In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.
202
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
20
Switch 3 position
indication (DTU 4)
Used for indication of the switch 3 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty
21
Switch 3 open command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Open command to the switch 3.
22
Switch 3 close command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Close command to the switch 3.
23
Switch 3 local remote
(DTU 4)
Used for indication of switch 3 local/remote switch.
24
Switch 3 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)
In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.
25
Switch 4 position
indication (DTU 4)
Used for indication of the switch 4 state open/close/
intermediate/faulty
26
Switch 4 open command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Open command to the switch 4.
27
Switch 4 close command
(DTU 4)
Used for sending Close command to the switch 4.
28
Switch 4 local remote
(DTU 4)
Used for indication of switch 4 local/remote switch.
29
Switch 4 selection on
monitor (DTU 4)
In internal use, tags the selection of the object
made in different pictures or monitors.
30
Extra BI1
Indication for extra binary input 1.
31
Extra BI2
Indication for extra binary input 2.
32
230 AC supply
Indication for auxiliary supply.
33
Heating resistor
Indication for heating state (ON/OFF).
34
Extra AI1
Indication for extra analog input 1.
35
Extra AI2
Indication for extra analog input 2.
36
Temperature
Indication for temperature within enclosure.
37
Battery voltage
Indication for battery voltage.
38
Extra AI1 max
Indication for maximum value of extra AI 1.
39
Extra AI2 max
Indication for maximum value of extra AI 2.
40
Minimum voltage
Indication for minimum battery voltage.
41
Status information
Indication for program status.
42
Program version
Indication of DTU program version.
43
Temperature setpoint
Setpoint for temperature.
44
Hysteresis setting
Setpoint for hysteresis of the temperature.
45
Charg. spont. transmit
Setpoint for spontaneous transmit of charging
change.
46
Extra AO1
Setpoint for reseting extra analog input 1.
47
Extra AO2
Setpoint for reseting extra analog input 2.
48
Minimum voltage reset
Setpoint for reseting the minimum battery voltage.
49
Indication polarity
Setpoint for indication polarity.
50
Heat. spont. transmit
Setpoint for spontaneous transmit of heating
change.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
203
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
11.3.5.
An Example of the DTU configuration
As an example, the configuration of the DTU is provided below:
Table 11.3.5-1 Configuration of the DTU
11.4.
Application engineering information
11.4.1.
The structure of the DTU
This chapter describes the structure of the DTU. All pictures, form pictures, help and
other text files as well as all database objects are included. DTU function is a part of
the MV Process of the LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS,
and the standard LIB 510 sub-directories INST, LANG0 and USE.
51
Temperature
Indication for heating setting value.
52
Hysteresis setting value
Indication for hysteresis setting value.
53
Charg. spont ON/OFF
Indication for spontaneous transmit of charging
changes.
54
Indication polarity
Indication for indication polarity.
55
Heating spont. ON/OFF
Indication for spontaneous transmit of heating
changes.
100
DTU blockings
Internal use for reporting DTU blockings.
110
DTU position indication
(upper)
This is used for converting the indication from
analog value to double binary value. For RTU it is
used as event recording object.
Index
Explanation
Purpose
Attribute
Value
ID
LINE1_Q1
STATION_NAME
Markham
BAY_NAME
LINE
DEVICE_NAME
Q1
P_OBJECT_LN
MARLINEQ1
STATION_TYPE
SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)
STATION_NUMBER
1
DTU_TYPE
DTU 1
DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER
N/A
COMMUNICATION
CONTINUOUS
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
N/A
CONNECTION_AT_SELECTION
Yes
SPEF
No
STATION_NUMBER_SPEF
N/A
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
MV_CONTROL
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
Yes
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_DISC2 (vertical link)
204
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
11.4.2.
Pictures
Below there is a list of all DTU pictures and a short description of their functionality.
Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this document. The paths are /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST
Table 11.4.2-1 DTU pictures
and /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE
Table 11.4.2-2 DTU pictures
Picture
Functionality
FPI_DTU.PIC
Small picture function (1*1) for DTU
FPI_DTUM.PIC
Medium picture function (2*2) for DTU
FPI_DTUL.PIC
Large picture function (3*3) for DTU
Picture
Functionality
FPU_DTUA.PIC
Main control dialog
FPU_DTUB.PIC
Control confirmation dialog
FPU_DTUC.PIC
Forced operation dialog
FPU_DTUD.PIC
Normal state setting dialog
FPU_DTUE.PIC
Object messages dialog
FPU_DTUF.PIC
Blocking dialog
FPU_DTUG.PIC
Alarm state dialog
FPU_DTUH.PIC
Operation counting dialog
FPU_DTUI.PIC
Data dialog
FPU_DTUJ.PIC
Settings dialog
FPU_DTUK.PIC
Program status dialog
FPU_DTUL.PIC
Extra inputs dialog
FPU_DTUM.PIC
Connection dialog
FPU_DTUN.PIC
Communication dialog
FPU_DTUO.PIC
Reserved
FPU_DTUP.PIC
Drop down list box
FPU_DTUQ.PIC
Drop down list box
FPU_DTUR.PIC
Fault indicator measured data dialog
FPU_DTUS.PIC
Fault indicator settings dialog
FPU_DTUT.PIC
Time syncronization dialog
FPU_DTUU.PIC
Update process data dialog
FPU_DTUV.PIC
Fault indicator recorded data dialog
FPU_DTUW.PIC
Fault indicator alarms dialog
FPU_DTUX.PIC
Position simulation dialog
FORM4FPDB1.PIC
Format picture for printing position indications
FORM4FPBO1.PIC
Format picture for object commands
FORM4FPBI1.PIC
Format picture for station local / remote indication
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
205
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
11.4.3.
Language text files
The following Text Translation Tool compatible text files are used by the DTU. The
path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 11.4.3-1 Compatible text files
11.4.4.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the DTU help text files. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 11.4.4-1 DTU help text files
11.4.5.
Configuration files
The following configuration files are used by the DTU. The path is LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS/INST
Text file
Functionality
FPI_DTU.TXT
Text file for the database creation of the picture function
FPU_DTU.TXT
Text file for all DTU dialogs
FORM4FPDB1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing position indications
FORM4FPBO1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing object commands
FORM4FPBI1.TXT
Text file for format picture of printing station local/remote indication
Help file
Functionality
FPI_DTU.HLP
Picture function installation help file
FPU_DTUA.HLP
DTU control dialog help file
FPU_DTUD.HLP
Normal state setting dialog help file
FPU_DTUE.HLP
Object messages dialog help file
FPU_DTUF.HLP
DTU blocking dialog help file
FPU_DTUG.HLP
Alarm state dialog help file
FPU_DTUH.HLP
Operation counting dialog help file
FPU_DTUI.HLP
Data dialog help file
FPU_DTUJ.HLP
Settings dialog help file
FPU_DTUL.HLP
Extra inputs dialog help file
FPU_DTUM.HLP
Connection dialog help file
FPU_DTUN.HLP
Communication dialog help file
FPU_DTUR.HLP
SPEF measured data dialog help file
FPU_DTUS.HLP
SPEF settings dialog help file
FPU_DTUT.HLP
Time syncronization dialog help dialog
FPU_DTUU.HLP
Update process data dialog help file
FPU_DTUV.HLP
SPEF recorded data dialog
FPU_DTUW.HLP
SPEF alarms dialog help file
FPU_DTUX.HLP
Position simulation dialog help file
206
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
Table 11.4.5-1 DTU configuration files
11.4.6.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the DTU. /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.
Table 11.4.6-1 DTU text files
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 11.4.6-2 DTU text files
‘APL’/PICT
Table 11.4.6-3 DTU text files
11.4.7.
Process objects
The DTU will create the following process objects with the Process Object Tool:
Table 11.4.7-1 DTU process objects created with the Process Object Tool
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_DTU.DAT
Contains the configuration data for DTU when it is created, modified
or deleted by configuration tools.
FPI_DTU.DAT
Contains the process object definitions for the Process Object Tool.
INDEX4_F1.TXT
Selection list of MV Process picture functions for LIB4 installation tool
(common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
FPI_DTUR.TXT
Command procedure for reading data from SPEF fault indicator via
DTU
FPI_DTUW.TXT
Command procedure for writing data to SPEF fault indicator via DTU
Text file
Functionality
FPU_AUTH.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for station authority check. This code is
executed by the main control dialog for DTU.
FPU_UPDATE.TXT
Contains the SCIL code for updating process objects when they are
update-deblocked. This code is executed by the command
procedure FPU_UPDATE.
FPU_DTUC.TXT
Command procedure for clock syncronization of DTU and SPEF.
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
Text file
Functionality
FPU_DTUS.TXT
Contains the information from stations to be updated by time
syncronization dialog.
Index Data type
Meaning Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
10
DB
Disconnector 1 position indication
DTU 1 &
DTU 4
FPQD07IPOS
11
BO
Disconnector 1 open command
DTU 1 &
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
207
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
12
BO
Disconnector 1 close command
DTU 1 &
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
13
BI
Disconnector 1 local/remote
DTU 1 &
DTU 4
FPQD07ILRS
14
AI
Disconnector 1 selected on monitor
DTU 1 &
DTU 4
FPQD07XMEV
15
DB
Disconnector 2 position indication
DTU 4
FPQD07IPOS
16
BO
Disconnector 2 open command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
17
BO
Disconnector 2 close command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
18
BI
Disconnector 2 local/remote
DTU 4
FPQD07ILRS
19
AI
Disconnector 2 selected on monitor
DTU 4
FPQD07XMEV
20
DB
Disconnector 3 position indication
DTU 4
FPQD07IPOS
21
BO
Disconnector 3 open command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
22
BO
Disconnector 3 close command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
23
BI
Disconnector 3 local/remote
DTU 4
FPQD07ILRS
24
AI
Disconnector 3 selected on monitor
DTU 4
FPQD07XMEV
25
DB
Disconnector 4 position indication
DTU 4
FPQD07IPOS
26
BO
Disconnector 4 open command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
27
BO
Disconnector 4 close command
DTU 4
FPQD07COBC
28
BI
Disconnector 4 local/remote
DTU 4
FPQD07ILRS
29
AI
Disconnector 4 selected on monitor
DTU 4
FPQD07XMEV
30
BI
Extra BI 1
FPQD07ISCE
31
BI
Extra BI 2
FPQD07ISCE
32
BI
230 VAC supply
FPQD07IALA
33
BI
Heating resistor
FPQD07ISCE
34
AI
Extra AI 1
FPQD07MMSC
35
AI
Extra AI 2
FPQD07MMSC
36
AI
Temperature
FPQD07MTMP
37
AI
Battery voltage
FPQD07MVOL
38
AI
Extra AI 1 maximum
FPQD07MMSC
39
AI
Extra AI 2 maximum
FPQD07MMSC
40
AI
Minimum battery voltage
FPQD07MVOL
41
AI
Program status information
FPQD07ISTS
42
AI
Program version
FPQD07IVER
43
AO
Temperature set point
FPQD07STMP
44
AO
Temperature hysteresis set point
FPQD07STMP
45
AO
Charging spontaneous transmit-
command
FPQD07CSCE
46
AO
Extra AI 1 maximum reset
FPQD07CMSC
47
AO
Extra AI 2 maximum reset
FPQD07CMSC
48
AO
Minimum battery voltage reset
FPQD07CVOL
Index Data type
Meaning Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
208
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
11. DTU
Configuration Guide
11.4.8.
Scale objects
At the first installation, the DTU creates the scales 1_1 (linear 1:1 scale),
FPU_1_1000 (linear 1:1000 scale), FPU_DTUBAT (linear 0..255 : 15..35 scale),
FPU_DTUE1 (linear 0..255 : 0..255 scale), FPU_DTUE2 (linear 0..255 : 0..255
scale), FPU_DTUHYS (linear 0..255 : 0..109 scale), FPU_DTUTEM (linear 0..255
: -40.. 60 scale).
49
AO
Indication polarity setting
FPQD07CSCE
50
AO
Heating spontaneous transmit setting
FPQD07CSCE
51
AI
Temperature setting
FPQD07MTMP
52
AI
Temperature hysteresis setting
FPQD07MTMP
53
AI
Charging spontaneous transmit
FPQD07ISCE
54
AI
Indication polarity
FPQD07ISCE
55
AI
Heating spontaneous transmit
FPQD07ISCE
56
AO
Guard tone set point
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07SMSC
57
AO
Answer after 1..10 calls set point
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07SMSC
58
AO
Timeout for answer set point
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07SMSC
59
AO
Delay after comma set point
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07SMSC
60
AO
Timeout for carrier wave set point
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07SMSC
61
AI
Guard tone
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
62
AI
Answer after 1..10 calls
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
63
AI
Timeout for answer
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
64
AI
Delay after comma
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
65
AI
Timeout for carrier wave
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
66
AI
Telephone number
Only for dial-
up comm.
FPQD07MMSC
100
AI
DTU blockings
FPQD07XBLK
110
AI
Disconnector 1 position indication
Only ANSI
(DTU 1/4)
FPQD07EPOS
115
AI
Disconnector 2 position indication
Only ANSI
(DTU 4)
FPQD07EPOS
120
AI
Disconnector 3 position indication
Only ANSI
(DTU 4)
FPQD07EPOS
125
AI
Disconnector 4 position indication
Only ANSI
(DTU 4)
FPQD07EPOS
Index Data type
Meaning Process object
Remarks
Group identifier
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
209
11. DTU
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
11
11.4.9.
Command procedures
At the first installation, the DTU creates the command procedure FPU_UPDATE,
which updates process objects when they are update-deblocked. This feature is
similar to the LIB 500 Blocking List function.
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI) type of station, the command procedure FPU_AI2DB
will be created at the installation. The command procedure FPU_AI2DB updates the
position indication double binary from the analog input.
Time synchronisation dialog creates the command procedure FPU_DTUCLK for
clock synchronisation.
11.4.10.
Event channels
For SPACOM / SRIO (ANSI)-type of station, the event channel FPU_AI2DB will
be created at the installation. The event channel FPU_AI2DB is set to activate the
command procedure FPU_AI2DB.
11.4.11.
Time channels
Time synchronisation dialog creates the time channel FPU_DTUCLK for activating
command procedure of the same name.
1MRS751887-MEN
SYS 500
211
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
12. Combined switch
device state
12
12.
Combined switch device state
12.1. Purpose
With Combined switch device state picture function it is possible to show open/close
state for the whole bay. In this way complex process pictures can be simplified.
From the Combined switch device state picture function actual process pictures
containing more detailed information can be opened. The state of the bay is
calculated according to position indications of switch devices and the electrical
connection of bay.
12.2. Communication
Support
Function is not protocol dependent
12.3. Picture
Function
Installation
This document describes the picture function of the MV Process Combined switch
device state. The picture function Combined switch device state is found in the
directory /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST and it should be installed by using
LIB4 installation procedures (LIB4/LIB510/MV Process 2.x/Switching Device/
Combined state). Configuration of this picture function shall be performed by using
configuration tools such as:
1. Standard Configuration Tool
2. Representation Tool
3. Process Object Tool
4. Bay Configuration Tool
12.3.1. Environmental
Requirements
In order for the Combined switch device state to have full functionality, the
following components need to be installed:
• Base
• Station (*)
• Bay (*)
• Switching devices
(*) These components are needed to get the full functionality of Bay Configuration
Tool.
12.3.2. Installation
There are three different sizes of the Combined switch device state picture function:
small (1*1), medium (2*2) and large (3*3). The size of the small switching device
picture function is 16 x 20 pixels (1 x 1 semigraphical block), the medium picture
function is 32 x 40 pixels (2 x 2 semigraphical blocks) and the large picture function
is 48 x 60 pixels (3 x 3 semigraphical blocks). The button frame is drawn out of this
area.
1MRS751887-MEN
212
1MRS751887-MEN
Manual Name
SYS 500
12. Combined switch
device state
Configuration Guide
)LJ 7\SLFDO&RPELQHGVZLWFKGHYLFHVWDWHLQVWDOODWLRQV
Table 12.3.2-1 During the installation, the following information has to be
given:
12.4. Picture
Function
Configuration
12.4.1. Preliminary
Work
Before the configuration of the picture functions can start, some preparatory
configurations are required (i.e. configurations that are required only once). The
usage of object identification (OI) attribute has to be settled, the naming convention
of the process object has to be decided, and the translation of the signal texts into
local language has to be performed. For more information, please refer to the
General chapter in this MV Process Configuration Manual.
12.4.2.
Configuration with Standard Configuration Tool
It is important to configure attributes in the order of appearance since setting one
attribute may enable/disable and/or reset another attribute later.
The Combined switch device state picture function has the following attributes to
configure with the Standard Configuration Tool:
Table 12.4.2-1 Standard configuration tool attributes
STATION_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the substation. By default, the maximum
length of the text is 9 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries. The configurable attribute is being
read directly from the process object database if there is
Attribute
Meaning
Default
Picture Function Name
Name of the picture function within the picture
-
Attribute
Meaning
Default
STATION_NAME
Name of the substation
-
BAY_NAME
Name of the bay
-
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
Name of the special identifier ‘nr’
-
CONTROL_PICTURE
The name of the process picture
-
SHOW_AS_DIALOG
Show picture in separate dialog
FALSE
SUFFIX_POSITION
Location of suffix
Lower right corner
1MRS751887-MEN
SYS 500
213
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
12. Combined switch
device state
12
any process object linked to the selected Combined switch
device state. Therefore, the configurable attribute within a
picture function has meaning only when the process
objects have not been created. This text will be used as a
substation identifier of the Combined switch device state
objects on event list, alarm list, printout, database query,
etc. It is very important that this text is similar to all
objects within the same substation.
BAY_NAME
A selector type of an editable combo box to select or enter
the name of the bay (feeder). By default, the maximum
length of the text is 14 characters. The selection list shows
up to ten latest entries.
The configurable attribute is being read directly from the
process object database if there is any process object
linked to the selected Combined switch device state.
Therefore, the configurable attribute within a picture
function has meaning only when the process objects have
not been created.
This text will be used as a bay (feeder) identifier of the
Combined switch device state objects on event list, alarm
list, printout, database query, etc. It is very important that
this text is similar to all objects within the same bay
(feeder).
CONTROL_PICTURE
The name of the actual process picture, which will
be opened when Combined switch device state picture
function is clicked. The maximum length of the text is 30
characters. Allowed characters are the letters A-Z, all
digits and the underscore(_).
SHOW_AS_DIALOG
An ON/OFF type of a toggle button to select dialog or
picture which will be opened when picture function is
clicked.
When this option is used It is recommended to use SLIB
dialog as a base for process pictures opened to dialog. The
window name of dialogs must be same as the control
picture name.
Note! Switch device picture function in dialog and in
actual process picture cannot have same name.
SUFFIX_POSITION
A selector type of combo box to select the position of the
suffix for the switching device.
The purpose of this configurable attribute is to provide the
possibility to show the status of the switching device with
letters beside the symbol.
The supported positions for the suffix are:
- None
- Upper right corner
- Lower right corner
- Lower left corner
214
1MRS751887-MEN
Manual Name
SYS 500
12. Combined switch
device state
Configuration Guide
- Upper left corner
The configuration is done in the Application Settings
picture, depending on how the status of the switching
device is wanted to be shown: with suffices, with colors,
or with both of them.
12.4.3.
Configuration with Representation Tool
The Combined switch device state picture function has the following attributes to
configure with the Representation Tool:
Table 12.4.3-1 Representation tool attributes
Table 12.4.3-2 The Combined switch device state requires a selector and a
symbol for the following conditions:
Combined switch device state uses the same sets of symbols as normal switching
devices. Please refer to some manual for more information.
Attribute
Meaning
Default
REPRESENTATION
Selection of symbol set
shown in the picture
F_REPR/F_
REPRESENTATION
The name of the representation (symbol set) used for the
Combined switch device state indication. The predefined
representation can be selected from the selector type of list called
Library Representations.
If there is no appropriate symbol set, it is possible to make and use
a representation set of your own. In that case one of the existing
representation sets can be copied to a representation file ../
APLMOD4/USE/ APLMOD4.PIR under the application and modify
each representation as needed. If object specific representations
are needed, the representation set (under the application) can be
renamed and the name of the representation can be written into the
selector with the logical path.
For example: F_REPR/MY_SET
Selector
Condition
Default color
1
Selected on monitor
white
2
Update blocked or obsolete value
magenta
3
Unacknowledged alarm
red, blinking
4
Acknowledged alarm
red
5
Warning or blockings (alarms, events, printouts or
reprocessing)
yellow
6
Manually entered
cyan
7
Normal state
green
8
Substituted
Dark blue
1MRS751887-MEN
SYS 500
215
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
12. Combined switch
device state
12
12.4.4.
Configuration with Bay Configuration Tool
)LJ %D\&RQILJXUDWLRQ7RRO
216
1MRS751887-MEN
Manual Name
SYS 500
12. Combined switch
device state
Configuration Guide
)LJ %D\/RJLF7RRO
Bay layout
The bay that corresponds to the actual bay can be chosen
by these layout pictures. With this layout picture the
program calculates the electric state of the bay.
Layout pictures:
1. Single busbar system
2. Single busbar system with bypass disconnector
3. Single busbar system with bypass busbar system
4. Double busbar system
5. Double busbar system with bypass busbar system
6. Duplex system
Device type
In the select of these attributes what devices are in use and
what is their device type can be defined.
The user defines only devices that he needs by choosing
circuit breaker, isolator or truck and rest he can be omitted
by choosing disabled.
Process object logical name
The database search fetches the logical names of
switching devices to the lists of comboboxes. The database
search requires that the attributes of a station, bay and
device type have been given. From the list, the right logical
name for the switching devices can be selected. The logical
name can be also written directly into combo box.
Indication type
The program automatically proposes the indication type to
the device the basis of device type and the logical name.
The Indication type can be also selected from the list of
combo-boxes.
Advanced … option
The user has a possibility to define bays by using
Advanced option. The bays defined by the user can be
saved and loaded to reused. It is recommended that the
logics defined by the user are saved in the sc/apl//pict
directory.
Examples of the syntax of bay logics:
(Only this kind of syntax has been allowed)
The Logic of Single Busbar System (layout picture 1 of
BCT)
%ln(1) and %ln(2) and %ln(3) and %ln(4)
The Logic of Single Busbar System with bypass
disconnector (layout picture 2 of BCT)
(%ln(1) and %ln(2) and %ln(3) and %ln(4)) or %ln(5)
If there is a need to change the row, just press the enter
before or after the logical operator.
1MRS751887-MEN
SYS 500
217
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
12. Combined switch
device state
12
12.4.5.
An example of the combined switch device state configuration
The configuration of the Combined switch device state with a horizontal field can
be given as an example:
Table 12.4.5-1 Configuration of the Combined switch device state
12.4.6.
The structure of the combined switch device state function
This chapter describes the structure of the Combined switch device state function.
All pictures, help and other text files are included. The Combined switch device state
function is a part of the MV Process of LIB 510 and has a directory /LIB4/FMOD/
MVPROCESS, and the standard LIB 510 subdirectories INST, LANG0 and USE.
The installation of the “instance” picture function (small, medium or large sized)
will automatically install “type” picture function (FPI_OVRT) if it does not already
exist. The “type” picture function contains all common programs for the “instance”
picture function and it is only visible at the Picture Editor.
12.4.7. Pictures
Below there is a list of all Combined switch device state function pictures and a short
description of their functionality. Dialogs are described in detail earlier in this
document. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST
Table 12.4.7-1 Combined switch device state function pictures
12.4.8.
Help text files
Below there is a list of the Combined switch device state help text files. The path is
/LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/LANG0.
Table 12.4.8-1 Combined switch device state help text file
Attribute
Value
Picture Function Name
OV1
STATION_NAME
Eastwick
BAY_NAME
Incoming 110kV
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
N/A
REPRESENTATION
F_REPR/F_BREAK2 (vertical link)
Picture
Functionality
FPI_OVRT.PIC
Common programs Combined switch device state function
FPI_OVRI_S.PIC
Small picture function Combined switch device state function
FPI_OVRI_M.PIC
Medium picture function for Combined switch device state function
FPI_OVRI_L.PIC
Large picture function for Combined switch device state function
FPI_BCT.VSO
Bay Configuration Tool
Help file
Functionality
FPI_OVR.HLP
Picture function installation help file Combined switch device state function
218
1MRS751887-MEN
Manual Name
SYS 500
12. Combined switch
device state
Configuration Guide
12.4.9. Configuration
files
The following configuration files are used by the Combined switch device state
function. The path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/INST.
Table 12.4.9-1 Combined switch device state configuration files
12.4.10.
Other text files
The following text files are used by the Combined switch device state function. The
path is /LIB4/FMOD/MVPROCESS/USE.
Table 12.4.10-1Combined switch device state text files
Configuration file
Functionality
FPI_OVR.DAT
Contains the configuration data for Combined switch device state
function when it is created, modified or deleted by the configuration
tools.
INDEX4_F11.TXT
Selection list of LIB 510 Rev 4.0.3 MV Process picture functions for
the Installation Tool (common for all other picture functions, too.)
Text file
Functionality
PATH4_F1.TXT
Contains the path definitions for the MV Process.
LIB 510
Index
Configuration Guide
Index
Page
6\PEROV
(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_AS_BAR
..................................................................... 101
(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT
........................................................................... 101
(*) SHOW_MEAS__mber’AS_BAR
........................................................................... 97
(*) SHOW_MEAS_’number’_UNIT
............................................................................ 97
(*/**) SHOW_MEAS__mber’
...................................................................................... 97
(*/**)SHOW_MEAS_'number'
................................................................................... 101
$
A symbols for the Alarm indicator
.............................................................................. 175
Active power symbol for the measurement
.........................................................105
Alarm indicator pictures
.............................................................................................. 177
Alarm limits of the measurement
................................................................................ 113
ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’
.................................................................... 174
ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL’x’
...................................................................... 171
ALARMING_STATE_OF_SIGNAL1
........................................................................ 177
AR_IN_PROGRESS_REPR
....................................................................................... 161
AR_IN_USE_REPR
AR_WITH_MULTIPLE_CYCLES
............................................................................ 159
Attributes
...............................................186
AUTHORIZATION_GROUP
AUTO_MANUAL_IND_TYPE
.........................................................................121
AUTO_MANUAL_INDICATION
............................................................................. 127
Auto-reclosing tag
AUXILIARY_PLUG
........................................................................................ 46
%
Bay picture function
BAY_LABEL
BAY_LR_IN_USE
........................................................................................... 27
BAY_NAME
Bell symbols for the Alarm indicator
.......................................................................... 176
&
CHANNEL_NUMBER
.................................................................................... 45
Circle symbol for the measurement
............................................................................. 105
Circle symbols for the truck
.......................................................................................... 78
CMD_PARAMETER
..........................................................................................121
Command procedure
Command procedures
COMMON_BAY_NAME
...................................................................................180
COMMUNICATION
................................................................. 181
COMPACT_INSTALLATION
........................................................ 46
Configuration files
Configuration of the picture functions
........................................................... 26
Configuration of the station picture function
................................................................ 19
Configuration of the switching device
.......................................................................... 82
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Index
Configuration Guide
CONNECT_TO_OBJECT
.......................................................................................... 127
CONNECTION_AT_SELECTION
............................................................196
CONTROL_BITS
.............................................................................................45
CONTROL_DIALOG_WINDOW
.................................................... 120
CONTROL_PULSE_LENGTH
........................................................................45
CONTROL_TYPE
............................................................................................45
Current symbol for the measurement
.......................................................................... 214
Current transducer 1 for the measurement
.................................................................. 107
Current transducer 2 for the measurement
.................................................................. 108
'
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT
.......................................................................................... 173
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’number’
................................................................... 101
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_’number’
.................................................................... 97
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_1
............................................................................... 112
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_2
............................................................................... 112
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_3
............................................................................... 112
DATA_ACQUISITION_UNIT_4
............................................................................... 112
Default set of representations for the protection latch
................................................ 150
Default set of representations for the protection trip
.................................................. 149
DEVICE_NAME
.................................................................180
DEVICE_USE
Diamond symbols for the disconnector
........................................................................ 66
DISCONNECTOR_NUMBER
...................................................................196
DTU installation
DTU picture function
DTU pictures
DTU_TYPE
................................................................................................196
(
EVENT_RECORDING
..................................................................................159
Examples of different configuration of transformer measurement
............................. 127
)
FOLDER_'number'_TITLE
........................................................................................ 100
FOLDER_’number_TITLE
.......................................................................................... 97
FOLDER_1_TITLE
FOLDER_2_TITLE
FOLDER_3_TITLE
FOLDER_4_TITLE
FUNCTION_BLOCK
......................................................................45
FUNCTION_BLOCK_'number'
................................................................................. 102
FUNCTION_BLOCK_’number’
.................................................................................. 97
FUNCTION_BLOCK_1
............................................................................................. 112
FUNCTION_BLOCK_2
............................................................................................. 112
FUNCTION_BLOCK_3
............................................................................................. 112
FUNCTION_BLOCK_4
............................................................................................. 112
+
HARD_WIRED
.......................................................................................................... 126
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
Index
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
HARDWIRED
Help text files
................................ 21
Horizontal link to the left symbols for the circuit breaker
............................................ 62
Horizontal link to the left symbols for the disconnector
............................................... 68
Horizontal link to the left symbols for the truck
.....................................................74
Horizontal link to the left symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker
Horizontal link to the left symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector
Horizontal link to the right symbol for the circuit breaker
............................................ 62
Horizontal link to the right symbol for the disconnector
.............................................. 68
Horizontal link to the right symbol for the truck
........................................................... 74
Horizontal link to the right symbols for the truck
......................................................... 76
Horizontal link to the right symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker
Horizontal link to the right symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector
,
ID
...............................................................................120
IND_DOUBLE_BINARY
................................................................................ 27
INDICATION_TYPE
....................................................................................... 45
Installation of a picture function
................................................................................... 25
Installation of picture function
..................................................................... 43
Installation of picture functions
..................................................................................... 11
Installation of the picture function
.............................................................................. 195
/
LATCH_REPRESENTATION
.................................................................................... 149
Led symbol for the Alarm indicator
............................................................................ 176
Library Representations
.............................................................................................. 149
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_
LINK_AR_TAG_TO_MODULE
................................................................................ 160
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_IX
................................................................................174
LINK_SIGNAL’nr’_TO_LN
..............................................................................174
LINK_SIGNAL’x’_IX
................................................................................................ 171
LINK_SIGNAL’x’_LN
............................................................................................... 171
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_LN_x
.................................................................................... 142
LINK_TRIP_TAG_TO_MODULE_x
......................................................................... 143
LR_REMOTELY_CONTROLLABLE
......................................... 13
0
MAX_POSIT
MAX_POSITION
...............................................................................................120
MEAS_'number'_DECIMALS
.................................................................................... 101
MEAS_’number_DECIMALS
...................................................................................... 97
MEAS_1_DECIMALS
............................................................................................... 112
MEAS_2_DECIMALS
............................................................................................... 112
MEAS_3_DECIMALS
............................................................................................... 112
MEAS_4_DECIMALS
............................................................................................... 112
MIN_POSIT
MIN_POSITION
.................................................................................................120
MOTORIZED
.................................................................................. 45
1
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
............................................................................................... 123
NOMINAL_VOLTAGE
......................................................................................120
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Index
Configuration Guide
2
Object identification (OI) -attribute
.............................................................................. 26
Object identification (OI) attribute
........................................................ 12
Object identification (OI)-attribute
............................................................................. 180
OUTPUT_STATUS
............................................................................................... 16
3
P_OBJECT_LN
PARALLEL_INDICATION
........................................................................................ 127
Picture
Picture Function Name
................................... 12
Pictures
Process object
Process Object Tool
................................18
Process objects
................................................................ 21
Protocol
Protocols
PULSE_COUNTER
............................................................................................ 181
5
Reactive power symbol for the measurement
............................................................. 107
REPRESENTATION
Representation Tool
....................................... 18
RMU with REC 501
6
Scales
SHOW_AR_IN_USE
SHOW_AR_NOT_IN_USE
....................................................................................... 159
SHOW_MEAS_1
SHOW_MEAS_1_AS_BAR
...................................................................................... 112
SHOW_MEAS_1_UNIT
............................................................................................ 112
SHOW_MEAS_2
SHOW_MEAS_2_AS_BAR
...................................................................................... 112
SHOW_MEAS_2_UNIT
............................................................................................ 112
SHOW_MEAS_3
SHOW_MEAS_3_AS_BAR
...................................................................................... 112
SHOW_MEAS_3_UNIT
............................................................................................ 112
SHOW_MEAS_4
SHOW_MEAS_4_AS_BAR
...................................................................................... 112
SHOW_MEAS_4_UNIT
............................................................................................ 112
SIGNAL’nr’_TEXT
SIGNAL’x’_TEXT
SIGNAL1_TEXT
SPACOM
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_'nr'
................................................................. 14
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_'number'
..............................................99
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_’nr’
SPECIAL_IDENTIFIER_x
............................................................. 19
SPEF
Square symbols for the circuit breaker
......................................................................... 60
Standard Configuration Tool
1MRS751887-MEN
LIB 510
Index
MV Process Configuration
Configuration Guide
Star symbols for the Alarm indicator
.......................................................................... 176
Station pictures
STATION_ADDRESS
........................................................................................181
STATION_LABEL
........................................................................................... 13
STATION_LR_IN_USE
................................................................................... 13
STATION_LR_POLARITY
................................................................................181
STATION_LR_SWITCH
....................................................................................181
STATION_NAME
STATION_NUMBER
................................................................................. 196
STATION_NUMBER_SPEF
..................................................................... 196
STATION_TYPE
,
Structure of the alarm indicator
................................................................................... 177
SWITCH_SECTION
....................................................................... 45
Switching device pictures
.............................................................................................. 83
SWITCHING_DEVICE_PURPOSE
.............................................. 45
SWITCHING_DEVICE_TYPE
...................................................... 45
SYMBOL_WITH_BUTTON
..........................................................177
7
TAP_POSITION_INDICATION
................................................................................ 127
TELEPHONE_NUMBER
......................................................... 181
Text Translation Tool compatible text files
TOPO_OBJECT COLOR3_NUMBER
...................................................................... 126
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR_NR
................................................................................... 130
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR1_NUMBER
............................................120
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR2_NUMBER
.................................................... 121
TOPO_OBJECT_COLOR3_NUMBER
.............................................................121
TOPO_OBJECT1_COLOR_NR
................................................................................. 130
TOPO_OBJECT2_COLOR_NR
................................................................................. 130
Transformer measurement
........................................................................................... 127
Transformer pictures
TRANSFORMER_TYPE
..................................................................120
TRIP_REPRESENTATION
........................................................................................ 146
TYPE_MEAS_’number’
.............................................................................................. 100
TYPE_MEAS_’number’
............................................................................................... 97
TYPE_MEAS_1
TYPE_MEAS_2
TYPE_MEAS_3
TYPE_MEAS_4
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’nr’
.....................................................................................174
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’number’
..................................................................................... 169
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL’x’
............................................................................................... 171
TYPE_OF_SIGNAL1
Typical installation for a visible station picture function
.............................................. 12
8
U_BINARY_INPUT_TEXTS
.............................................................................181
U_EXTRA_INPUT_TEXTS
...............................................................................196
U_INTERLOCKING
......................................................46
U_OTHER_OBJECTS
1MRS751887-MEN
MV Process Configuration
LIB 510
Index
Configuration Guide
9
Vertical link downwards symbol for the circuit breaker
............................................... 63
Vertical link downwards symbol for the disconnector
.................................................. 69
Vertical link downwards symbol for the truck
........................................................ 72
Vertical link downwards symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker
Vertical link downwards symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector
Vertical link upwards symbol for the circuit breaker
.................................................... 61
Vertical link upwards symbol for the disconnector
....................................................... 67
Vertical link upwards symbol for the truck
................................................................... 73
Vertical link upwards symbols for the truck
................................................................. 76
Vertical link upwards symbols of contactor for the circuit breaker
.............................. 64
Vertical link upwards symbols of load breaking switch for the disconnector
Voltage transducer 1 for the measurement
.................................................................. 105
VOLTAGE_INDICATION
......................................................................................... 127
Document Outline
- MV process general
- Installing and configuring MV Process functions
- Graphical representations and functionality
- The default RI-attribute values for printouts within MV Process
- Format picture for double binary (OV related)
- Format picture for single binary indication (OV related)
- Format picture for analog indication (OV related)
- Format picture for analog indication (AZ related)
- Format picture for analog indication (integer OV)
- Format picture for analog indication (real OV)
- Format picture for binary output (OV & SE related)
- Format picture for digital output (OV related)
- Format picture for analog output (OV related)
- Station
- Bay
- Switching device
- Measurements
- Transformer
- Protection tripping tag
- Auto-reclosing (AR) tag
- Alarm indicator
- REC 501
- DTU
- Combined switch device state
- Purpose
- Communication Support
- Picture Function Installation
- Picture Function Configuration
- Preliminary Work
- Configuration with Standard Configuration Tool
- Configuration with Representation Tool
- Configuration with Bay Configuration Tool
- An example of the combined switch device state configuration
- The structure of the combined switch device state function
- Pictures
- Help text files
- Configuration files
- Other text files
Wyszukiwarka
Podobne podstrony:
LIB 510 MV Process Operator s Manual
LIB 510 Configuration Manual
LIB 510 Operator s Manual
LIB 500 Configuration Manual
W4 Proces wytwórczy oprogramowania
WEWNĘTRZNE PROCESY RZEŹBIĄCE ZIEMIE
Proces tworzenia oprogramowania
Proces pielęgnowania Dokumentacja procesu
19 Mikroinżynieria przestrzenna procesy technologiczne,
4 socjalizacja jako podstawowy proces spoeczny
modelowanie procesˇw transportowych
Proces wdrazania i monitoringu strategii rozwoju
Wykorzystanie modelu procesow w projektowaniu systemow informatycznych
więcej podobnych podstron